2006 azera manual

TGgene-11.p65 6/16/2005, 5:25 PM1

Seoul Korea

Printing : JUN. 20, 2005Publication No.:A3LO-EG56APrinted in Korea

TGgene-11.p65 6/16/2005, 5:25 PM2

NAME:STREET:TOWN:COUNTRY:P.CODE:

NAME:STREET:TOWN:COUNTRY:P.CODE:

A000A01A-GAT

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of thenext owner.

OWNER'S I.D.

ORIGINAL:ADDRESS:

DATE OF SALE:

SUBSEQUENT:ADDRESS:

TRANSFER DATE:

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:17 PM2

OWNER'S MANUAL

A030A01TG-GAT

OperationMaintenanceSpecifications

All information in the Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. Hyundai reserves the right to makechanges at any time as part of our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to current Hyundai models and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment areincluded. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

Please note that some models are equipped with Right-Hand Drive (RHD). The explanations and illustrations for someoperations in RHD models are opposite of those written in this manual.

A030A01TG

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM3

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As theowner, it is your responsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by themanufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals. When the vehicle is usedin severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for someoperations. Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are alsoincluded in Section 5.

A020A01A-AAT

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM4

A050A05A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note: Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell thisHyundai, please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels andlubricants that do not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuelsand lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specificationssection of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2005 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may bereproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without theprior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number ofdiscriminating people who drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality constructionof each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It issuggested that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to thesatisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed byan authorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service,maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

!

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM5

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic compo-nents. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellulartelephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommendthat you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundaidealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install oneof these devices.

A080A01S-AAT

A070A01A-GAT ! CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Modification of components may void the manufacturer's warrantyYour Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Modifications may adversely affectthe safety, durability and performance of your Hyundai. Components which aresubjected to modification or are added to the vehicle resulting in consequentialdamage are not covered by the vehicle manufacturer's warranty.

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM6

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION5

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM7

!

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death toyou or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice providedwith the warning.

CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or itsequipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with thecaution.

NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

A090A01A-AAT

!

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM8

A100A01L-GAT

GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINEPARTS

1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the sameparts used by Hyundai Motor Com-pany to manufacture vehicles. Theyare designed and tested for theoptimum safety, performance, andreliability to our customers.

2. Why should you use genuineparts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi-neered and built to meet rigid manu-facturing requirements. Using imi-tation, counterfeit or used salvage

A100A01L

parts are not covered under theHyundai New Vehicle Limited War-ranty or any other Hyundai war-ranty. In addition, any damage to orfailure of Hyundai Genuine Partscaused by the installation or failureof an imitation, counterfeit or usedsalvage part is not covered byHyundai Motor Company.

3. How can you tell if you purchas-ing Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine PartsLogo on the package (see below).

The export specifications are writ-ten in English only.

A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only soldthrough authorized Hyundai Dealer-ship and Service Center.

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM9

B250A01TG-GAT

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (LEFT-HAND DRIVE) (I)

B250A01TG

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM10

1. Headlight Leveling Device Switch (If Installed)2. Rear Fog Light Switch (If Installed)3. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Switch

(If Installed)4. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch)5. Steering Wheel Tilt & Telescopic Lever6. Hood Release Lever7. Cigarette Lighter

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near theinstrument cluster nor on the instrument panel pad surface. If there is any leakage from theair freshener onto these areas (instrument cluster, instrument panel pad or air ventilator), itmay damage these parts. If the liquid from air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash themwith water immediately.

!

NOTE:Switch arrangements from No. 1 to No. 4 can be changed according to options.

8. Front Ashtray9. Front Seat Warmer (If Installed)10.Rear Window Curtain Switch (If Installed)11.Digital Clock12.Passenger's Seat Belt Warning Light (If Installed)13.Hazard Warning Switch14.Power Outlet

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM11

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (LEFT-HAND DRIVE) (II)

B250B01TG-GAT

B250B01TG

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM12

1. Fuse Box2. Instrument Cluster3. Parking Brake Pedal4. Brake Pedal5. Accelerator Pedal6. Multi-Function Light/Front Fog Light Switch7. Audio Remote Control Switch (If Installed)8. Horn and Driver's Airbag9. Cruise Control Switch (If Installed)

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrumentcluster nor on the instrument panel pad surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto theseareas (instrument cluster, instrument panel pad or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquidfrom air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

!

10. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch11. Audio System (If Installed)12. Passenger's Front Airbag (If Installed)13. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel14. Glove Box15. Accessory Box16. Shift Lever17. Drink Holder18. Center Console

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM13

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (RIGHT-HAND DRIVE) (I)

B250C01TG-GAT

B250A01TG-R

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM14

1. Digital Clock2. Passenger's Seat Belt Warning Light (If Installed)3. Hazard Warning Switch4. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Switch

(If Installed)5. Steering Wheel Tilt & Telescopic Lever6. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch)7. Rear Fog Light Switch (If Installed)


!

NOTE:Switch arrangements from No. 6 to No. 8 can be changed according to options.

8. Headlight Leveling Device Switch (If Installed)9. Hood Release Lever10.Front Seat Warmer (If Installed)11.Front Ashtray12.Cigarette Lighter13.Rear Window Curtain Switch (If Installed)14.Power Outlet

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM15

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (RIGHT-HAND DRIVE) (II)

B250D01TG-GAT

B250B01TG-R

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM16

1. Fuse Box2. Instrument Cluster3. Parking Brake Pedal4. Accelerator Pedal5. Brake Pedal6. Multi-Function Light/Front Fog Light Switch7. Cruise Control Switch (If Installed)8. Horn and Driver's Airbag9. Audio Remote Control Switch (If Installed)


!

10. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch11. Audio System (If Installed)12. Passenger's Front Airbag (If Installed)13. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel14. Glove Box15. Accessory Box16. Shift Lever17. Drink Holder18. Center Console

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM17

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

B255A01TG-GAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

High Beam Indicator Light

Door Ajar Warning Light

Seat Belt Warning Light

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

Passenger's Front Airbag OFFIndicator Light (If Installed)

ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid LevelWarning Light

Charging System Warning Light

SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)

Cruise Indicator Light (If Installed)

Malfunction Indicator Light

Electronic Stability Program IndicatorLights (If Installed)

Low Windshield Washer Fluid LevelWarning Light

Front Fog Indicator Light

Cruise SET Indicator Light (If Installed)

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-62.

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Trunk Lid Open Warning Light

Immobilizer Warning Light (If Installed)

TGgene-0.P65 6/9/2005, 5:18 PM18

Fuel Recommendations ............................................... 1-2Breaking In Your New Hyundai .................................... 1-3Keys.............................................................................. 1-4Immobilizer System ...................................................... 1-5Door Locks ................................................................... 1-9Theft-Alarm System .....................................................1-13Windows ......................................................................1-16Seats ...........................................................................1-20I.M.S (Integrated Memory System)..............................1-26Seat Belts ....................................................................1-32Child Restraint System ................................................1-38Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System .................1-48Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights .......................1-60Warning and Indicator Lights .......................................1-64Trip Computer ..............................................................1-73Multi-function Light Switch ...........................................1-77Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch................................1-81Sunroof ........................................................................1-90Mirror ...........................................................................1-97Hood Release ............................................................1-107Cruise Control ............................................................1-111Heating and Cooling Control ......................................1-115Stereo Sound System ...............................................1-134Audio System ............................................................1-137Antenna .....................................................................1-157

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

11

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:01 PM1

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2

B010A02A-GAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump OctaneRating of 87 (Research Octane Number91) or higher must be used in Hyundaivehicle. If leaded gasoline is used, itwill cause the catalytic converter tobecome ineffective and the emissioncontrol system to malfunction.This can also result in increased main-tenance expense. To avoid accidentaluse of leaded fuel, the large nozzleused with leaded gasoline at servicestations can not be inserted into thefuel tank opening of Hyundai vehicle.

NOTE:o For some countries, Hyundai ve-

hicles are designed to use leadedgasoline. When you are going touse leaded gasoline, ask toHyundai dealer whether leadedgasoline in your vehicle is avail-able or not.

o Octane Rating of leaded gaso-line is same with unleaded one.

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?

Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleadedgasoline and 10% ethanol or grainalcohol) may be used in your Hyundai.However, if your engine develops driveability problems, the use of 100% un-leaded gasoline is recommended. Fu-els with unspecified quantities of alco-hol, or alcohols other than ethanol,should not be used.

B010D01S-AAT

Do not Use Methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood al-cohol) should not be used in yourHyundai. This type of fuel can reducevehicle performance and damage com-ponents of the fuel system.

! CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Lim-ited Warranty may not cover dam-age to the fuel system and perfor-mance problems that are caused bythe use of methanol or fuels con-taining methanol.

B010A01TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM2


3BREAKING IN YOUR NEWHYUNDAI

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air,Hyundai recommends that you usegasolines treated with detergent addi-tives, which help prevent deposit for-mation in the engine. These gasolineswill help the engine run cleaner and theEmission Control System performance.

B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries

If you are going to drive your Hyundaiin another country, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regardingregistration and insurance.

o Determine that acceptable fuel isavailable.

B020A01S-GAT

During the First 2,000 Km(1,200 Miles)

No formal "break-in" procedure is re-quired with your new Hyundai. How-ever, you can contribute to the eco-nomical operation and durability of yourHyundai by observing the followingrecommendations during the first 2,000km (1,200 miles).

o Don't drive faster than 88 km/h (55mph).

o While driving, keep your enginespeed (rpm, or revolutions perminute) between 2,000 rpm and4,000 rpm.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don'tstart quickly or depress the accel-erator pedal fully.

o For the first 300 km (200 miles), tryto avoid hard stops.

o Don't lug the engine (in other words,don't drive so slowly in too high agear that the engine "bucks":shift toa lower gear).

o Whether going fast or slow, vary yourspeed from time to time.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than3 minutes for a catalytic converterequipped engine.

o Don't tow a trailer during the first2,000 km (1,200 miles) of opera-tion.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM3


4 KEYS

B030A01NF-GAT

For greater convenience, your Hyundaihas two master keys and a sub key.The master keys will open all locks onyour vehicle. The sub key will onlyfunction in the ignition and the doorlocks.

Leaving your sub key with a parkingattendant will ensure that your vehicle'strunk, trunk lid release, glove box com-partment and rear trunk access maynot be unlocked in your absence.

NOTE:Before leaving your sub key with aparking attendant, make sure thatthe lock knobs of the rear seat backlock and the trunk lid lock areswitched to the "LOCK" position.

B030A01TGMaster key Sub key

B031A01LZ-GAT

Before leaving sub key with park-ing attendant

When leaving sub key with parkingattendant, the following procedures willensure that your vehicle's trunk andglove box can not be unlocked in yourabsence.

1. Unlock the glove box with the masterkey and open it.

2. Set the trunk lid control button in theglove box to the "OFF" position (notdepressed). In the "OFF" position,the trunk can not be unlocked witheither the trunk release lever or trunkopen button of transmitter.

B541A01TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM4


5

B030B01NF-GAT

Record Your Key Number

A code number is attached on thenumber tag that came with the keys toyour Hyundai. This key number tagshould not be left with the keys butkept in a safe place, not in the vehicle.The key number should also be re-corded in a place where it can be foundin an emergency.If you need additional keys, or if youshould lose your keys, your authorizedHyundai dealer can make new keys ifyou can supply the key number.

B030B01TG

3. Close the glove box, and lock theglove box using the master key.

4. Leave the sub key with the atten-dant. Trunk and glove box are se-cured because sub key only allowsengine start and door lock and un-lock.

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

B880A01A-GAT

(If Installed)

The immobilizer system is an anti-theftdevice, designed to deter automobiletheft.

B880B01NF-GAT

Two Types of Keys

For greater convenience, your Hyundaihas two types of keys as shown in theillustration.

1) Master keyThis key is for general use. It will openall locks on your vehicle. One side ofthe key has the Hyundai logo and theother side has the "M" symbol.

B880B01TGSub keyMaster key

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM5


6

!2) Sub key

Similar to the master key, this keywill only function in the ignition andthe door locks, but it will not operatethe trunk and the glove box. Oneside of the key has the Hyundai logoand the other side has an "S" sym-bol.Leaving your sub key with a parkingattendant will ensure that yourvehicle's trunk, trunk lid release,glove box compartment and reartrunk access may not be unlockedin your absence.

NOTE:o Before leaving your sub key with

a parking attendant, make surethat the lock knobs of the seatback lock and the trunk lid lockare switched to the "LOCK" posi-tion.

o If you make your own duplicatekey, you will not be able to cancelthe system or start the engine.

CAUTION:When staring the engine, do notuse the key with other immobilizerkeys around. Otherwise the enginemay not start or may stop soonafter it starts.Keep each key separately not tohave any malfunction after you re-ceive your new vehicle.

B031A01LZ-GAT

Before leaving sub key with park-ing attendant

When leaving sub key with parkingattendant, the following procedures willensure that your vehicle's trunk andglove box can not be unlocked in yourabsence.

1. Unlock the glove box with the masterkey and open it.

2. Set the trunk lid control button in theglove box to the "OFF" position (notdepressed). In the "OFF" position,the trunk can not be unlocked witheither the trunk release lever or trunkopen button of transmitter.

B541A01TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM6


7

3. Close the glove box, and lock theglove box using the master key.

4. Leave the sub key with the atten-dant. Trunk and glove box are se-cured because sub key only allowsengine start and door lock and un-lock.

In the interest of security, the numbertag attached to the keys which bearsthe key number should be removedfrom the key string after you receiveyour new vehicle. In addition, key num-bers cannot be provided by Hyundai forsecurity reasons.If you need additional keys or if youshould lose your keys, your authorizedHyundai dealer can make new keys ifyou can supply the key number andmaster key.

B880C01NF-GAT

Key Numbers

The vehicle key number is recordedupon a number tag attached to thekeys when the vehicle is first deliveredto you.The key number should be recordedand kept in a safe place in case theneed to order further keys arises. Newkeys are available from any Hyundaidealer by quoting the relevant keynumber.

B880C01TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM7


8

B880D01TG-GAT

Limp Home Procedures2. Wait for 3~10 seconds.3. You may set the remaining number

of digits by following the same pro-cedures 1 and 2.

4. If all of four digits have been triedsuccessfully, turn the ignition key"ON" and check that the immobi-lizer indicator illuminates. From thistime, you have to start your enginewithin 30 seconds. If you start yourengine after 30 seconds, your en-gine will not start.

NOTE:If the engine dies while driving afterlimp home procedure, you can startyour engine within 3 seconds with-out limp home procedure again.

5. If the immobilizer indicator blinks forfive seconds, you have to try thelimp home procedure again fromthe beginning.

After doing the limp home procedure,you have to consult with your autho-rized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-sible.

HTG3012

In case the immobilizer warning indica-tor blinks for five seconds when theignition key is turned to "ON" position,this indicates that the immobilizer sys-tem is out of order. And you cannotstart the engine without the limp homeprocedures with ignition key.The following procedure is how to startthe engine with the function of the limphome (0, 1, 2, 3 as a sample pass-word).

NOTE:You can get the limp home pass-word when the vehicle is first deliv-ered to you. If you do not have thepassword, consult your authorizedHyundai dealer.

1. To set the password you may turnthe ignition key "ON" and then turnit "OFF" according to the digit num-bers, then the immobilizer indicatorwill blink along with the operation ofthe ignition key. For example, turnthe ignition key once for digit num-ber "1", and twice for "2", and so on.However, for the digit number "0",you must turn the ignition key for 10times.

B880D01TG

Conventional Type

Supervision Type

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM8


9

B030C01JM-AAT

ILLUMINATED IGNITIONSWITCH

Whenever either front door is opened,the ignition switch will be illuminatedfor your convenience, provided theignition switch is not in the "ON" posi-tion.The light will go off approximately 10seconds after closing the door or whenthe ignition switch is turned on.

B030C01E

CAUTION:o If you fail to try the limp home

procedure with the sequence ofthree times, you have to wait forabout one hour to do the limphome procedure again.

o If you cannot start your engine inspite of limp home procedure,have your vehicle towed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

! !

DOOR LOCKS

B040A01NF-GAT

WARNING:o Unlocked doors can be danger-

ous. Before you drive away (es-pecially if there are children inthe car), be sure that all the doorsare securely closed and lockedso that the doors cannot be inad-vertently opened from the inside.This helps ensure that doors willnot be opened accidentally. Also,when combined with the properuse of seat belts, locking thedoors will keep occupants frombeing ejected from the car in caseof an accident.

o Before opening the door, alwayslook for and avoid oncoming traffic.

o In case of accident, the door isunlocked automatically (If In-stalled).

o Do not lock the door using the keyor the transmitter until all passen-gers have left the car because thedoor is not unlocked by the doorlock switch when locking the doorusing the key or the transmitter (IfInstalled).

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM9


10

!

B040B01TG-AAT

Locking and Unlocking FrontDoors With a Key

o The door can be locked or unlockedwith a key.

o Lock the door by turning the keytoward the front of the vehicle andunlock it by turning the key towardthe rear.

B040C02Y-AAT

Locking from the Outside

The doors can be locked without a key.To lock the doors from the outside, firstpush the inside lock switch to the"LOCK" position, so that the red markon the switch is not visible, then closethe door.The door will not lock if the key is left inthe ignition switch when the front doorsare closed. This is normal.

HTG2008

B040C01TG

LOCK

UNLOCK

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in an enclosed vehicle isdangerous. They can be overcomeby the extreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

WARNING:Do not lock the door using the key orthe transmitter until all passengershave left the car because the door isnot unlocked by the door lock switchwhen locking the door using the keyor the transmitter (If Installed). Leav-ing children, helpless adults, or petsin an enclosed vehicle is dangerous.They can be overcome by the ex-treme heat and suffer permanent in-juries or even death from heat stroke.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM10


11

NOTE:o When locking the door this way,

be careful not to lock the doorwith the ignition key left in thevehicle.

o To discourage theft, always re-move the ignition key, close allwindows and lock all doors whenleaving your vehicle unattended.

B040D01NF-AAT

Locking from the Inside

To lock the doors from the inside, sim-ply close the door and push the lockswitch to the "LOCK" position.

NOTE:o When the door is locked, the red

mark on the switch is not visible.o The driver's and front passenger's

doors can be opened by pullingthe inside door handle even if theinside lock switch is pushed to the"LOCK" position.

HTG2009

LOCKUNLOCK

WARNING:Be careful not to pull the inside doorhandle while driving. If you pull theinside door handle, the door can beopened and you may be ejected fromthe vehicle and can be injured orkilled.

!

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM11


12

!

Your Hyundai is equipped with a "child-protector" rear door lock assembly.When the lock mechanism is engaged,the rear door cannot be opened fromthe inside. Its use is recommendedwhenever there are small children inthe rear seat.

To engage the child-protector featureso that the door cannot be openedfrom the inside, move the child-protec-tor lever to the " " position and closethe door. Move the lever to the " "position when normal door operation isdesired.

If you wish to be able to open the doorfrom the outside, the outside door handlewill function normally.

B040E04A-AAT

Child-Protector Rear Door Lock

HTG2011-1

o The driver's and front passenger'sdoors can be opened by pullingthe inside door handle even if thefront portion of the driver's or frontpassenger's central door lockingswitch has been depressed to lockthe doors.

WARNING:Be careful not to pull the inside doorhandle while driving. If you pull theinside door handle, the door can beopened and you may be ejected fromthe vehicle and can be injured orkilled.

B040G01NF-AAT

Central Door Locks

The central door locking switch is lo-cated on the driver's and frontpassenger's armrest. It is operated bydepressing the door lock switch. If anydoor is open when the switch is de-pressed to the "LOCK" position, thedoor will remain locked when closed.

NOTE:o When pushing the front portion

of the driver's or frontpassenger's door lock switch, allvehicle doors will lock.

o When pushing the rear portion ofthese switches, all vehicle doorswill unlock.

B040G01TG

Driver's side

Front passenger's sideLOCK UNLOCK

LOCKUNLOCK

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM12


13THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B070A01A-AAT

(If Installed)

This system is designed to provideprotection from unauthorized entry intothe car. This system is operated inthree stages: the first is the "Armed"stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage,and the third is the "Disarmed" stage.If triggered, the system provides anaudible alarm with blinking of the turnsignal lights.

B070B01TG-AAT

Armed Stage

B070B01TG

1) Remove the ignition key from theignition switch.

2) Make sure that the engine hood andtrunk lid are closed and latched.

3) Lock the doors using the transmitterof the keyless entry system.

If the steps are completed as above,the security LED lamp on thepassenger’s crash pad will illuminatefor about 30 seconds, and then thelamp will blink continuously when thesystem is entered into the armed stage.The turn signal lights will blink once toindicate that the system is armed.

NOTE:1) If any door, trunk lid or engine

hood remains open, the systemwill not be armed.

2) If this happens, rearm the systemas previously described.

Lock

UnlockTrunk Unlock

Park the car and stop the engine. Armthe system as described below.

! CAUTION:Do not arm the system until all pas-sengers have left the car. If the sys-tem is armed while a passenger(s)remains in the car, the alarm may beactivated when the remainingpassenger(s) leaves the car.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM13


14

CAUTION:Only the transmitter can disarm thearmed stage. If the transmitter doesnot disarm the system, it is neces-sary to take the following steps;

1. Unlock the door with the key,which will cause the alarm to beactivated.

2. Insert the key in the ignition keycylinder and turn the ignition keyto "ON" position.

3. Wait for 30 seconds.

After completing the steps above,the system will be disarmed.

!

! CAUTION:Avoid trying to start the engine whilethe system is armed.

B070D01TG-GAT

Disarmed Stage

The system will be disarmed when thedriver's or passenger's door is un-locked by depressing the "UNLOCK( )" button on the transmitter.

After completion of the step above, theturn signal lights will blink twice toindicate that the system is disarmed.

NOTE:Although the system is disarmed,the security LED lamp will blink con-tinuously. Insert the key in the igni-tion key cylinder to turn off the lamp.

If any door, trunk lid or engine hood isnot opened or the ignition key is notinserted in the ignition switch within 30seconds, the system will be rearmed.

B070C01TG-GAT

Alarm Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of thefollowing occurs while the car is parkedand the system is armed.

1) A front or rear door is opened with-out using the transmitter.

2) The trunk lid is opened without us-ing the transmitter.

3) The engine hood is opened.

The alarming horn will sound and theturn signal lights will blink continuouslyfor 27 seconds. To turn off the system,unlock the door or trunk lid with thetransmitter.

B070C01TG

NOTE:When the system is disarmed whilethe "DOOR" button of the interiorlight is depressed, the interior lightwill illuminate for 30 seconds.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM14


15

B070F01NF-GAT

Keyless Entry System(If Installed)Locking doors

1. Close all doors.2. Push the " " button on the

transmitter.3. At the same time, all doors lock and

the turn signal lights will blink onceto indicate that the system is armed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the " " button on thetransmitter.

2. At the same time, all doors unlockand the turn signal lights will blinktwice to indicate that the system isdisarmed.

Releasing the trunk lid

Push the trunk lid release button ( )on the transmitter for longer than 1second.

B070E01NF-GAT

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter's battery beginsto get weak, it may take several pusheson the button to lock or unlock thedoors, and the LED will not light. Re-place the battery as soon as possible.

Battery type : CR2032

Replacement instructions:

1. Separate the case with a coin asshown in the illustration.

B070E01TG

HTG2006

Battery

2. Remove the old battery from thecase and note the polarity. Makesure the polarity of the new batteryis the same(+side facing up), theninsert it in the transmitter.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM15


16 WINDOWS

B060D01TG

1. Driver's door power window switch2. Front passenger's door power win-

dow switch3. Rear passenger's door power win-

dow switch (left side)4. Rear passenger's door power win-

dow switch (right side)5. Window lock switch

B060D01NF-GAT

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM16


17

B060A01TG-GAT

POWER WINDOWS

The power windows operate when theignition key is in the "ON" position. Themain switches are located on thedriver's armrest and control the frontand rear windows on both sides of thevehicle. The windows may be openedby depressing the appropriate windowswitch and closed by pulling up theswitch. To open the window on thedriver's side, press the switch halfwaydown. The window moves as long asthe switch is operated.

B060A01TG

NOTE:If the battery has been recharged ordisconnected, the auto up/down win-dow system must be reset as fol-lows;

1. Turn the ignition key to "ON"position.

2. Close each window and continuepulling up on each power windowswitch for at least 0.5 second afterthe window is completely closed.

If the auto up/down window is notreset, it may not be operated prop-erly.

Front Auto Up/Down Windows

Open Close

B060A02TG

Driver's side

Front passenger's side

The auto up/down window is controlledby the window switch on the driver's andfront passenger's armrest.To fully open the window automatically,press the switch fully down. To fullyclose the window automatically, pullthe switch fully up. In automatic opera-tion, the window will fully open or closeeven if you let go of the switch. To stopthe window at the desired position whilethe window is in operation, pull up ordepress and release the switch to theopposite direction of the movement.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM17


18

B060A03TG

CloseOpen

Window lock

! CAUTION:o The safety window will only oper-

ate when the automatic up win-dow operation feature is used.Safety window will not operate ifthe window is raised using thehalfway down position on thepower window switch.

o If an object less than 4 mm indiameter is caught between thewindow glass and the upper win-dow channel, the safety windowmay not detect the resistance andwill not operate. Therefore, al-ways check for any obstructionsbefore raising any window.

B060C01TG-GAT

Front Safety Windows

If the upward movement of the windowis blocked by an object or part of thebody, the window will detect the resis-tance and will stop upward movement.The window will then lower approxi-mately 30cm to allow the object to becleared.

HTG2021

NOTE:The power windows can be operatedfor 30 seconds after the ignition keyis turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK"positions, or removed from the igni-tion switch.If the front doors are opened duringthese 30 seconds period, the powerwindows can no longer be operatedwithout the ignition key turned to the"ON" position.

In order to prevent operation of thepassenger front and rear windows, awindow lock switch is provided on thearmrest of the driver's door. To disablethe power windows, press the windowlock switch. To revert to normal opera-tion, press the window lock switch asecond time.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM18


19

! WARNING:o Be careful that someone's head,

hands and body are not trappedby a closing window.

o Never try to operate the mainswitch on the driver's door andthe individual door windowswitch in opposing directions atthe same time. If this is done, thewindow will stop and cannot beopened or closed.

o Do not leave children alone in thecar. Always remove the ignitionkey for their safety.

B060D01TG-GAT

Closing and Opening the Win-dows with a Key

The driver’s and passenger’s windowscan be closed or opened with a key inthe driver’s door.

To close the windows, turn the keytoward the front of the vehicle for 3seconds.If the key is turned toward the rear of thevehicle while closing the window, thewindow will stop upward movement.

HTG2201

To open the windows, turn the keytoward the rear of the vehicle for 3seconds.If the key is turned toward the front ofthe vehicle while opening the window,the window will stop downward move-ment.

HTG2200

!WARNING:

Be careful that someone’s head,hands and body are not trapped by aclosing window.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM19


20 SEATS

Driver’s seat

1. Seat forward/rearward lock releaselever

2. Seatback recliner control lever3. Seat height control lever (If Installed)4. Lumbar support control knob5. Seat warmer switch (If Installed)

Front passenger’s seat

6. Seat forward/rearward lock releaselever

7. Seatback recliner control lever8. Seat warmer switch (If Installed)

Front power seats (If Installed)

9. Lumbar support control knob10.Seatback recliner control knob11.Seat forward/rearward lock release

knob, Seat height control knob12.Seatback recliner control knob13.Seat forward/rearward lock release

knob

B080A01TG-GAT

B080A01TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM20


21

!!

SEATS

B080A01A-AAT

ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS

WARNING:Never attempt to adjust the seatwhile the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, or anaccident which may cause death,serious injury, or property damage.

B080B02A-AAT

Adjusting Seat Forward andRearward

To move the seat toward the front orrear, pull the lock release lever up-ward. This will release the seat on itstrack so you can move it forward orrearward to the desired position. Whenyou find the position you want, releasethe lever and slide the seat forward orrearward on its track until it locks intothe desired position and cannot bemoved further.

HTG2033

B080C01A-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

To recline the seatback, lean forward totake your weight off it, then pull up onthe recliner control lever at the outsideedge of the seat. Now lean back untilthe desired seatback angle is achieved.

HTG2034

WARNING:To ensure the seat is locked se-curely, attempt to move the seatforward or rearward without usingthe lock release lever.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM21


22

!

!

WARNING:

WARNING:To minimize risk of severe injury inthe event of a collision or a suddenstop, both the driver and passen-ger seatbacks should always be inan upright position while the ve-hicle is in motion. The protectionprovided by the seat belts andairbags may be reduced signifi-cantly when the seatbacks are re-clined. There is greater risk that thedriver and passenger will slide un-der the seat belt which may result inserious injury if a crash occurs whenthe seatbacks are reclined.The seat belt cannot provide fullprotection to an occupant if theseatback is reclined.

B080D02JM-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

Headrests are designed to help reducethe risk of neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it up. Tolower it, push it down while pressingthe lock knob. To remove the head-rest, raise it as far as it can go thenpress the lock knob while pulling up-ward. This should only be done whenthe seat is not occupied.

B080D02TG

To lock the seatback into position,release the recliner control lever.

B080D01TG

o For maximum effectiveness in caseof an accident the headrest shouldbe adjusted so the middle of theheadrest is at the same height asthe top of the occupant's eyes. Forthis reason, the use of a cushionthat holds the body away from theseatback should not be recom-mended.

o Do not operate vehicle with theheadrests removed as injury tothe occupants may occur in theevent of an accident. Headrestsmay provide protection against

Lock knob

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM22


23

neck injuries when properly ad-justed.

o Do not adjust the headrest heightwhile the vehicle is in motion.

B081D01LZ-AAT

Tilting Headrest Forward andRearward

The headrest may be tilted forward tothree different positions by pulling theheadrest forward. To adjust the head-rest rearward, pull it fully forward to thefarthest position and release it. Adjustthe headrest so that it properly sup-ports the head and neck.

HTG2045

B090E01TG-AAT

Lumbar Support Control(Driver's seat only)

To adjust the lumbar support, press thecontrol switch on the outboard side ofthe seat cushion. To increase the amountof lumbar support, press the front por-tion of the switch. To decrease it, pressthe rear portion of the switch.

HTG2042-1

B083D01NF-AAT

Active Headrests (If Installed)

The active headrest is designed tomove forward and upward during a rearimpact. This helps to prevent the driver'sand front passenger's head from mov-ing backward and thus helps preventneck injuries.

HNF2041-1

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM23


24

!

B090B01NF-GAT

Adjusting Seat Forward andRearward

Pull the control knob forward or back-ward to move the seat forward or back-ward to the desired position. Releasethe control knob and the seat will re-main at that position.

HTG2037

B080F01NF-GAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment(Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed)

To raise or lower the seat, raise or lowerthe control lever to the desired seatheight.

HTG2035

B090A01TG-AAT

FRONT POWER SEATS(If Installed)

The front seats can be adjusted appro-priately by using the control knob of theseat. Before driving, adjust the seat tothe proper position so as to easilycontrol the steering wheel, pedals andswitches on the instrument panel.

CAUTION:Do not operate two knobs at thesame time.

WARNING:o Never attempt to adjust the seat

while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, oran accident causing death, seri-ous injury, or property damage.

o Do not sit or lean unnecessarilyclose to the airbag.

!

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM24


25

!B090D01NF-GAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

Pull the upper portion of the controlknob forward or backward to reclinethe seatback to the desired position.Release the control knob and theseatback will remain in that position.

HTG2040

WARNING:To minimize the risk of personalinjury in the event of a collision ora sudden stop, both the driver'sand passenger's seatback shouldremain in an upright position whilethe car is in motion. The protectionprovided by the seat belts andairbags may be reduced signifi-cantly when the seatbacks are re-clined. There is a greater risk thatthe seat occupants will slide underthe belt resulting in serious injuryif a crash occurs when the seatbacksare reclined. The seat belt cannotprovide full protection to an occu-pant if the seatback is reclined.

B090C01Y-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment(Driver's seat only)

Move the front portion of the controlknob up or down to raise or lower thefront part of the seat cushion. Move therear portion of the control knob up ordown to raise or lower the rear part ofthe seat cushion.

HTG2041

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:02 PM25


26

NOTE:o If the battery has been recharged

or disconnected, the driving posi-tion memory will be lost.

o The buzzer sounds 10 times ifthere is a malfunction of theintergrated memory system. Havethe I.M.S checked by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer.

I.M.S control switch

It is located on the driver's door trim andwill function as follows;

SET: When the button is pressed, thesystem will memorize the posi-tion with a beep sound.

1,2 : It indicates that the system canmemorize positions up to 2 occu-pants.

B090E01TG-AAT

Lumbar Support Control(Driver's seat only)

To adjust the lumbar support, press thecontrol switch the outboard side of theseat cushion. To increase the amountof lumbar support, press the front por-tion of the switch. To decrease it, pressthe rear portion of the switch.

HTG2042-2

I.M.S (INTEGRATEDMEMORY SYSTEM)

B090E01TG-GAT

The Integrated Memory System con-trols are located on the driver's doortrim. After adjusting the position of thedriver's seat and steering wheel col-umn (with electric tilt and telescopictype), use the I.M.S to memorize them.Two different driving position profilescan be entered in the I.M.S. If you turnthe ignition key to the "ON" position, thememorized position is adjusted auto-matically.

B090E01TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM26


27

CAUTION:In the following conditions, the I.M.Swill not activate.

1. When the key is in the "OFF"positon.

2. When the vehicle is running above3 km/h.

3. When the seat is being adjusted.4. When the shift lever is positioned

in other than "P" position.

! CAUTION:In the following conditions, the I.M.Swill not memorize.

1. When the "1" or "2" button is notpushed within five seconds.

2. When the seat is being adjusted.3. When the key is not in the "ON"

position.4. When the shift lever is positioned

in other than "P" position.

To activate the memorized posi-tion

1. Place the shift lever into "P" whilethe ignition switch is ON.

2. When you push button "1" or "2", thedriving position will be automaticallyadjusted to the position recorded forthat button.

!

To memorize driving position

1. Place the shift lever into "P" whilethe ignition switch is ON.

2. Adjust the driver's seat and steeringwheel column (with electric tilt andtelescopic type) to the desired posi-tion.

3. Push the "SET" button on the I.M.Suntil the signal beeps.

4. Within five seconds, push button "1"or "2" until the signal beeps twice.The beep sounds mean that the po-sitions are memorized in the I.M.S.

Reverse Parking Aid Function

While the vehicle is moving backward,the outside rearview mirror(s) will movedownward to aid reverse parking safely.According to the position of the outsiderearview mirror switch knob, the out-side rearview mirror(s) will operate asfollows.

B090E02TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM27


28

!

NOTE:o The seat warmer may not operate

if ambient temperature is warmenough.

o If the seat warmer doesn't workwhen the ambient temperature islower than 24°C, it must bechecked at an authorized dealer.

WARNING:Be very careful not to injure by lowtemperature burn or an attack offever as following occupants; infants,children, old man, drunken man,people who is taken sleeping drug orcold remedy.

B100A01TG-GAT

SEAT WARMER (If Installed)

The front seats can be electricallyheated individually when the ignitionswitch is ON. When the switch is ON, anumber ranging from 1 to 5 is displayedon the switch (5 = warmest setting).To turn off the seat warmer, set theswitch to 0.

B100A01TG

L : When the remote control outsiderearview mirror switch knob is se-lected to the "L" position, both oftheoutside rearview mirrors will movedownward.

R :When the remote control outsiderearview mirror switch knob is se-lected to the "R" position, only thepassenger's outside rearview mir-ror will move downward.

Neutral :When the remote control out-side rearview mirror switchknob is placed in the middleposition, the outside rearviewmirrors will not operate whilethe vehicle is moving back-ward.

NOTE:When the ignition key is in the"LOCK" position, the shift lever ismoved to any position except "R"position, or the remote control out-side rearview mirror switch knob isplaced in the middle position, theoutside rearview mirrors will auto-matically revert to original position.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM28


29

! WARNING:The purpose of the folding rearseatbacks is to allow you to carrylonger objects than could other-wise be accommodated. Do not al-low passengers to sit on top of thefolded down seatback, while thecar is moving as this is not a properseating position and no seat beltsare available for use. This couldresult in serious injury or death incase of an accident or sudden stop.Objects carried on the folded downseatback should not extend higherthan the top of the front seats. Thiscould allow cargo to slide forwardand cause injury or damage duringsudden stops.

B110A01NF-GAT

REAR SEATFOLDING REAR SEATBACKS

o To unlock the seatback, pull theseatback release lever, then pull for-ward on the seatback panel.

o When you return the seatback to itsupright position, always be sure ithas locked into position by pullingand pushing on the top of theseatback.

B110A01TG

B085D01TG-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

Headrests are designed to help reducethe risk of neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it up. Tolower it, push it down while pressingthe lock knob. To remove the head-rest, raise it as far as it can go thenpress the lock knob while pulling up-ward. This should only be done whenthe seat is not occupied.

B080D01TG-1

Lock knob

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM29


30

B140A01S-AAT

REAR SEAT WARNING

For the safety of all passengers, lug-gage or other cargo should not be piledhigher than the top of the seatback. Inaddition, do not place objects on therear shelf as they may move forwardduring braking or in an accident andstrike vehicle passengers.

B140A01TG

B120A01NF-GAT

REAR SEATBACK SAFETYLOCK (If Installed)

If the rear seatback lock knob (locatedon the backside of the rear seatback)is in the "LOCK" position when the rearseatbacks are closed, it will not bepossible to fold the rear seatback byusing the seatback release lever. Inthis instance, move the lock knob tothe "UNLOCK" position and fold therear seatback. The rear seatback lockknob is designed to provide protectionfrom unauthorized entry into the trunk.

B120A01TG

! WARNING:

B080D02TG-1

o For maximum effectiveness in caseof an accident the headrest shouldbe adjusted so the middle of theheadrest is at the same height asthe top of the occupant's eyes. Forthis reason, the use of a cushionthat holds the body away from theseatback should not be recom-mended.

o Do not operate vehicle with theheadrests removed as injury tothe occupants may occur in theevent of an accident. Headrestsmay provide protection againstneck injuries when properly ad-justed.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM30


31SEAT BELTS

B150A02A-GAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

All occupants of the vehicle shouldwear their seat belts at all times. In-deed, your province's laws may re-quire that some or all occupants of thevehicle use seat belts.The possibility of injury or the severityof injury in an accident will be de-creased if this elementary safety pre-caution is observed. In addition, thefollowing recommendations are made:

B150B01Y-GAT

Infant or Small Child

Some countries require the use ofchild restraint systems for infants andsmall children. Whether this is requiredby law or not, it is strongly recom-mended that a child restraint seat orinfant restraint system be used forinfants or small children weighing lessthan 18 kilograms (40 pounds).

NOTE:Small children are best protected inan accident when properly re-strained by a child restraint sys-tem.

B150C02A-AAT

Larger Children

Children who are too large for childrestraint systems should always oc-cupy the rear seat and use the avail-able lap/shoulder belts. The lap por-tion should be fastened snug on thehips and as low as possible. Checkbelt fit periodically. A child's squirmingcould put the belt out of position. Chil-dren are afforded the most safety inthe event of an accident when they arerestrained by a proper restraint sys-tem in the rear seat. If a larger child(over age 13) must be seated in thefront seat, the child should be securelyrestrained by the available lap/shoul-der belt and the seat should be placedin the rearmost position. Children un-der the age of 13 should be restrainedsecurely in the rear seat. NEVER placea child under the age of 13 in the frontseat. NEVER place a rear facing childseat in the front seat of a vehicle.

B150D01A-AAT

Pregnant Women

The use of a seat belt is recommendedfor pregnant women to lessen thechance of injury in an accident. Whena seat belt is used, the lap belt portionshould be placed as low and snugly aspossible on the hips, not across theabdomen. For specific recommenda-tions, consult a physician.

B150E01A-AAT

Injured Person

A seat belt should be used when aninjured person is being transported.When this is necessary, you shouldconsult a physician for recommenda-tions.

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt

Two people (including children) shouldnever attempt to use a single seat belt.This could increase the severity ofinjuries in case of an accident.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM31


32

!

B160A01A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Seat belt systems should never bedisassembled or modified. In addition,care should be taken to assure thatseat belts and belt hardware are notdamaged by seat hinges, doors orother abuse.

WARNING:When you return the rear seatbackto its upright position after the rearseatback was folded down, be care-ful not to damage the seat belt web-bing or buckle. Be sure that thewebbing or buckle does not getcaught or pinched in the rear seat.

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat beltsbe inspected periodically for wear ordamage of any kind. Parts of the sys-tem that are damaged should be re-placed as soon as possible.

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean anddry. If belts become dirty, they can becleaned by using a mild soap solutionand warm water. Bleach, dye, strongdetergents or abrasives should not beused because they may damage andweaken the fabric.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly orassemblies should be replaced if thevehicle has been involved in an acci-dent. This should be done even if nodamage is visible. Additional ques-tions concerning seat belt operationshould be directed to your HyundaiDealer.

! WARNING:Sitting in a reclined position or ly-ing down when your vehicle is inmotion can be dangerous. Even ifyou buckle up, your seat belts can'tdo their job when you're reclined.The shoulder belt can't do its jobbecause it won't be against yourbody. Instead, it will be in front ofyou. In a crash you could go into itwith great force, receiving seriousneck or other injuries. The lap beltcan't do its job either. In a crash thebelt could go up over your abdomen.

B150G01A-AAT

Do Not Lie Down

To reduce the chance of injuries in theevent of an accident and to achievemaximum effectiveness of the restraintsystem, all passengers should be sit-ting up and the front seats should be inan upright position when the car ismoving. A seat belt cannot operateproperly if the person is lying down inthe rear seat or if the front seat is in areclined position.

The belt forces would be appliedthere, not at your pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internal inju-ries. For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit well backin the seat and wear your seat beltproperly. See page 1-27.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM32


33

B170A04A-GAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONTSEAT SHOULDER BELT

You can adjust the height of the shoul-der belt anchor to one of 4 positions formaximum comfort and safety.If the height of the adjusting seat belt istoo near your neck, you will not begetting the most effective protection.The shoulder portion should be ad-justed so that it lies across your chestand midway over your shoulder near-est the door and not your neck.To adjust the height of the seat beltanchor, lower or raise the height ad-juster into an appropriate position.

HTG2058

!

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up.To lower it, push it down while pressingthe height adjuster button.Release the button to lock the anchorinto position. Try sliding the heightadjuster to make sure that it has lockedinto position.

WARNING:o The height adjuster must be in

the locked position when thevehicle is moving.

o The misadjustment of height ofthe shoulder belt could reducethe effectiveness of the seat beltin a crash.

B180A01Y-GAT

SEAT BELTS 3-Point System withEmergency Locking RetractorTo Fasten Your Belt

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of theretractor and insert the metal tab intothe buckle. There will be an audible"click" when the tab locks into thebuckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts tothe proper length only after the lap beltis adjusted manually so that it fitssnugly around your hips. If you leanforward in a slow, easy motion, the beltwill extend and let you move around. Ifthere is a sudden stop or impact, how-ever, the belt will lock into position.

B180A01NF

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM33


34

It will also lock if you try to lean forwardtoo quickly. Check to make sure thatthe belt is properly locked and that thebelt is not twisted.

B260E01TG-GAT

Seat Belt Warning Light(Except E.C)

The seat belt warning light blinks forabout 6 seconds when the ignition keyis turned from the "OFF" position to the"ON".

NOTE:You can find the front passenger'sseat belt warning light on the centerfascia panel.

User (Driver+Front Passenger) ConditionSeat Belt Warning Light

Seat Belt Ignition SwitchUnbuckled ON Stay on until buckled upBuckled ON Come on for 6 seconds

Unbuckled ON *1 Blink until buckled upBuckled →→→→→ Unbuckled ON Blink until buckled up*2

*1) When the ignition key is turned from "OFF" position to "ON" within 1 minute.*2) If the vehicle speed exceeds 9km/h, the seat belt chime also sounds for about

1~2 minutes.If the vehicle speed is below 9km/h, 1 minute later the seat belt chime alsosounds for about 1~2 minutes.

NOTE:o You can find the front passenger's seat belt warning light on the center

fascia panel.o If the driver's seat belt is operated in this order "unbuckled →→→→→ buckled →→→→→

unbuckled" within 9 seconds after the seat belt is buckled, the seat beltwarning light and chime will not activate.

o Although the front passenger seat is not occupied, the seat belt warninglight will illuminate for 6 seconds.

o The seat belt warning light could be operated when luggage is placed onthe front passenger seat.

The seat belt warning light and chime will activate to the following table.

B265E01TG-GAT

Seat Belt Warning Light and Chime(E.C only)

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM34


35

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

The seat belt is released by pressingthe release button in the locking buckle.When it is released, the belt shouldautomatically draw back into the re-tractor.If this does not happen, check the beltto be sure it is not twisted, then tryagain.

B210A01NF

B200A01S-GAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

You should place the belt as low aspossible on your hips, not on yourwaist. If the belt is located too high onyour body, you could slide under it incase of accident or a sudden stop.This could result of death, seriousinjury or property damage. Both armsshould not be under or over the belt.Rather, one should be over and theother under, as shown in the illustra-tion.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door.

B200A01NF

B220A01NF-GAT

SEAT BELTS - Rear Seat Center3-Point System with EmergencyLocking Retractor

1. Pull the seat belt out of the rear seatpackage tray.

2. Before fastening the rear seat centerbelt, confirm the metal tab (a) andbuckle (b) are latched together.

B220A01TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM35


36

o Lock the metal tab (a) and thebuckle (b) immediately after fold-ing rear seatbacks up.

o To disconnect the metal tab (a)from the buckle (b), insert a nar-row-ended tool into the groovelocated on the buckle (b).

B220A03TG

! WARNING:o When using the rear seat center

belt, you must lock all metal tabsand buckles. If any metal tab orbuckle is not locked, it will in-crease the chance of injury in theevent of collision.

o Never unlock the metal tab (a)and the buckle (b) with the fol-lowing exceptions.(1) In case of folding rear seatbacks

down.(2) If transporting an object on the

rear seat may cause damage tothe rear seat center belt.

B180A01NF-EB220A02TG

3. After confirming that (a) and (b) arelatched, pull the seat belt out of theretractor and insert the metal tab (c)into the buckle (d).

There will be an audible "click" whenthe tab locks in the buckle. The seatbelt automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt is adjustedmanually so that it fits snugly aroundyour hips. If you lean forward in a slow,easy motion, the belt will extend andlet you move around. If there is asudden stop or impact, the belt will lockinto position. It will also lock if you try tolean forward too quickly.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM36


37

!

!

B220C02A-GAT

To Release the Seat Belt

When you want to release the seat belt,press the button in the locking buckle.

WARNING:When fastening the outboard seatbelts or the center seat belt, makesure they are inserted into the cor-rect buckles to obtain maximumprotection from the seat belt sys-tem and assure proper operation.

B220C01TG

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

B230A03A-GAT

(If Installed)

Children riding in the car should sit inthe rear seat and must always beproperly restrained to minimize therisk of injury in an accident, suddenstop or sudden maneuver. Accordingto accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rearseats than in the front seat. Largerchildren not in a child restraint shoulduse one of the seat belts provided.You are required by law to use safetyrestraints for children. If small childrenride in your vehicle you must put themin a child restraint system (safety seat).Children could be injured or killed in acrash if their restraints are not properlysecured. For small children and ba-bies, a child seat or infant seat must beused. Before buying a particular childrestraint system, make sure it fits yourcar seat and seat belts, and fits yourchild. Follow all the instructions pro-vided by the manufacturer when in-stalling the child restraint system.

WARNING:o A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Neverinstall a child or infant seat onthe front passenger's seat.Should an accident occur andcause the passenger's front airbagto deploy, it could severely injureor kill an infant or child seated inan infant or child seat. Thus, onlyuse a child restraint in the rearseat of your vehicle.

o A safety belt or child restraintsystem can become very hot if itis left in a closed vehicle on asunny day, even if the outsidetemperature does not feel hot. Besure to check the seat cover andbuckles before placing a childthere.

o When the child restraint systemis not in use, store it in the trunkor fasten it with a safety belt sothat it will not be thrown forwardin the case of a sudden stop or anaccident.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM37


38

Use the center seat belt for the rear tosecure the child restraint system asillustrated. After installation of thechild restraint system, rock the childseat back and forth, and side to side toensure that it is properly secured bythe seat belt.If the child seat moves, readjust thelength of the seat belt. Then, ifequipped, insert the child restrainttether strap hook into the child re-straint hook holder and tighten to se-cure the seat. Always refer to the childrestraint system manufacturer's rec-ommendation before installing the childrestraint system in your vehicle.

B235G01TG

B230F01A-GAT

Installation on Center Rear Seatso Never use an infant carrier or childsafety seat that "hooks" over aseatback; it may not provide ad-equate security in an accident.

o Never allow a child to be held in aperson's arms while they are in amoving vehicle, as this could re-sult in serious injury to the childin the event of an accident or asudden stop. Holding a child in amoving vehicle does not providethe child with any means of pro-tection during an accident, even ifthe person holding the child iswearing a seat belt.

o If the child restraint seat is notanchored properly, the risk of achild being seriously injured orkilled in a collision greatly in-creases.

o Children who are too large to be ina child restraint should sit in therear seat and be restrained withthe available lap/shoulder belts.Never allow children to ride in thefront passenger seat.

o Always make sure that the shoul-der belt portion of the outboardlap/shoulder belt is positionedmidway over the shoulder, neveracross the neck or behind theback. Moving the child closertoward the seat belt buckle mayhelp provide a good shoulderbelt fit. The lap belt portion of thelap/shoulder belt or the centerseat lap belt must always be po-sitioned as low as possible onthe child's hips and as snug aspossible.

o If the seat belt will not properly fitthe child, Hyundai recommendsthe use of an approved boosterseat in the rear seat in order toraise the child's seating heightso that the seat belt will properlyfit the child.

o Never allow a child to stand up orkneel on the seat.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM38


39

!

B230G01NF

B230G01JM-GAT

Installation on the Outboard RearSeats

To install a child restraint system on theoutboard rear seats, extend the shoul-der/lap belt from its retractor. Bucklethe seat belt and allow the seat belt totake up any slack. Make sure that thelap portion of the belt is tight around thechild restraint system and the shoulderportion of the belt is positioned so thatit cannot interfere with the child's heador neck. After installation of the childrestraint system, try to move it in alldirections to be sure the child restraintsystem is securely installed.

If you need to tighten the belt, pull morewebbing toward the retractor. When youunbuckle the seat belt and allow it toretract, the retractor will automaticallyrevert back to its normal seated pas-senger emergency locking usage con-dition.

NOTE:o Before installing the child re-

straint system, read the instruc-tions supplied by the child re-straint system manufacturer.

o If the seat belt does not operateas described, have the systemchecked immediately by yourauthorized Hyundai dealer.

WARNING:o Do not install any child restraint

system in the front passenger seat.Should an accident occur andcause the passenger's front airbagto deploy, it could severely injureor kill an infant or child seated inan infant or child seat. Therefore,only use a child restraint systemin the rear seat of your vehicle.

o Before installing Child RestraintSystem to vehicles fitted with Cur-tain Airbags, always refer to safetynotices for Curtain Airbag sys-tems on this manual. Wheneverinstalling child restraints, use onlyapproved devices and refer to"Child Restraint System" to en-sure correct installation and occu-pant protection is maximized.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM39


40

B230C02TG

Rear seat package tray

Tether StrapHook

Front of Vehicle

2. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable head-rests, route the tether strap underthe headrest and between the head-rest posts, otherwise route the tetherstrap over the top of the seatback.

Child Restraint Hook Holders

B230C03A-GAT

Securing a Child Restraint Sys-tem with "Tether Anchorage"System

Three child restraint hook holders arelocated on the rear seat package tray.

B230C01NF

Tether Anchor Cover

1. Open the tether anchor cover on therear seat package tray.

Child RestraintHook Holder

B230B02A-AAT

Using a Child Restraint SystemWith "Tether Anchorage" Sys-tem

For small children and babies, the use ofa child seat or infant seat is stronglyrecommended and may be required inyour state. This child seat or infant seatshould be of appropriate size for thechild and should be installed in accor-dance with the manufacturer's instruc-tions. It is further recommended thatthe seat be placed in the vehicle's rearseat since this can make an importantcontribution to safety. Your vehicle isprovided with three child restraint hookholders on the rear seat package trayfor installing the child seat or infant seat.

Holder Bolt(5/16"-22 mm)

B230B01TG

Conical Spring Washer

Child RestraintHook Holder

Retainer Washer

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM40


41

B230D01TG-GAT

Securing a Child Restraint Sys-tem with "ISOFIX" System and"Tether Anchorage" System

ISOFIX is a standardized method offitting child seats that eliminates theneed to use the standard adult seatbelt to secure the seat in the vehicle.This enables a much more secure andpositive location with the added benefitof easier and quicker installation.

B230D01NF

On each side of the rear seat, betweenthe cushion and backrest, are located apair of ISOFIX anchorage points to-gether with a top tether mounting on therear seat package tray. During the in-stalling, the seat has to be engaged atthe anchorage-points in a way you canhear it clicking (check by pulling!) andhas to be fixed with the TopTether-belton the belonging point of the rear seatpackage tray. The installing and theuse of a child-seat has to be doneaccording to the installing-manual,which is added to the ISOFIX-seat.

B230D02TG

ISOFIX Anchor

ISOFIX AnchorPosition Indicator

3. Connect the tether strap hook to thechild restraint hook holder andtighten to secure the seat.

B230D03TG

NOTE:An ISOFIX-child-seat can only beinstalled if the seat has a vehicle-specific approval according to ECE-R44. Before using the ISOFIX-child-seat, which was bought for anothercar, ask your Hyundai-dealerwhether this seat-type is approvedand recommended for yourHyundai.

To secure the child restraint seat

1. To engage the child restraint seat tothe ISOFIX anchor, insert the childrestraint seat latch into the ISOFIXanchor. Listen for the audible "click"sound.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM41


42

B230H01JM-GAT

Child Seat Restraint SuitabilityFor Seat Position

Use child safety seats that have beenofficially approved and are appropriatefor your children.When using the child safety seats,refer to the following table.

Rear

Center

Age GroupSeating Position

L1, L2,

L3, L4X

X X

X X

X X

Rear

Outboard

Front

Passenger

0 : Up to 10 kg

(0 ~ 9 months)

0+ : Up to 13 kg

(0 ~ 2 years)

I : 9kg to 18kg

(9 months ~

4 years)

II & III : 15kg to

36kg

(4 ~ 12 years)

X

L1, L2,

L3, L4

L3, L5,

L6, L7, L8

L6, L9

L1 : Suitable for Bebe confort ELIOS(E2 037014) approved for the usein this mass group

L2 : Suitable for PegPerego primoViaggio (E13 030010) approvedfor the use in this mass group

vehicle rear seat belt metal latchplates or tabs must be latchedsecurely in their seat belt bucklesand the seat belt webbing must beretracted behind the child restraintto prevent the child from reachingand taking hold of unretracted seatbelts. Unlatched metal latch platesor tabs may allow the child toreach the unretracted seat beltswhich may result in strangulationand a serious injury or death to thechild in the child restraint.

o Do not mount more than one childrestraint to a single tether or achild restraint lower anchoragepoint. The improper increased loadmay cause the anchorage pointsor tether anchor to break, causingserious injury or death.

o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com-patible child seat only to the ap-propriate locations shown in theillustration.

o Always follow the installation anduse instructions provided by themanufacturer of the child re-straint.

! WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint seat

at the center of the rear seat usingthe vehicle's ISOFIX anchors. TheISOFIX anchors are only providedfor the left and right outboard rearseating positions. Do not misusethe ISOFIX anchors by attemptingto attach a child restraint seat inthe middle of the rear seat to theISOFIX anchors. In a crash, thechild seat ISOFIX attachments maynot be strong enough to securethe child restraint seat properly inthe center of the rear seat and maybreak, causing serious injury ordeath.

o When using the vehicle’s “ISOFIX”system to install a child restraintsystem in the rear seat, all unused

2. Connect the tether strap hook to thechild restraint hook holder and tightento secure the seat. Refer to "Secur-ing a Child Restraint System WithTether Anchorage System" on page1-34.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM42


43

L3 : Suitable for Bebe confort iSEOS(E2 039014) approved for the usein this mass group

NOTE:Use it after adjusting the headrestto the lowest level.

L4 : Suitable for GRACO Autobaby(E11 03. 44.160/E11 03.44.161)approved for the use in this massgroup

L5 : Suitable for Romer Lord Plus (E103301136) approved for the use inthis mass group

L6 : Suitable for Euro Kids Star(E1 03301128/E1 03301129)approved for the use in this massgroup

L7 : Suitable for BeSafe iZi COMFORT(E4 03443206) approved for thisuse in this mass group

NOTE:Use it after removing the headrestor adjusting the headrest to thelowest level.

L8 : Suitable for MAXI-COSI Priori XP(E1 03301153) approved for theuse in this mass group

L9 : Suitable for Bebe confort HiPSOS(E2 031011) approved for this usein this mass group

NOTE:Use it after removing the headrest.

X : Seat position not suitable for chil-dren in this mass group

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or ifthe occupant tries to lean forward tooquickly, the seat belt retractor will lockinto position.

HXG229

B180B01NF-GAT

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt(If Installed)

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped withdriver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts. The purpose ofthe pre-tensioner is to make sure thatthe seat belt fits tightly against theoccupant's body in certain frontal col-lisions.The pre-tensioner seat belts can beactivated with the airbags.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM43


44

NOTE:o Both the driver's and front

passenger's pre-tensioner seatbelts will be activated in certainfrontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be acti-vated with the airbags.

o When the pre-tensioner seat beltsare activated, a loud noise maybe heard and fine dust, whichmay appear to be smoke, may bevisible in the passenger compart-ment. These are normal operat-ing conditions and are not haz-ardous.

o Although it is harmless, the finedust may cause skin irritationand should not be breathed forprolonged periods. Wash all ex-posed skin areas thoroughly af-ter an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.

!

The seat belt pre-tensioner systemconsists mainly of the following compo-nents, whose locations are shown inthe illustration:

1. SRS airbag warning light2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module4. Buckle pre-tensioner assembly

B180B01NF

1

23

Driver's airbagPassenger'sairbag

WARNING:To obtain maximum benefit from apre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn cor-rectly.

2. The seat belt must be adjusted tothe correct position.

4!

In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seatbelt into tighter contact against theoccupant's body. The buckle pre-tensioner (which is installed in thebuckle) will also pull the seat belt intothe buckle.

CAUTION:Do not put anything near the buckle.Placing objects near the buckle canadversely affect the buckle pre-tensioner and may increase the riskof personal injury in the event of acollision.

If the system senses excessive seatbelt tension on the driver or passenger'sseat belt when the pre-tensioner acti-vates, the load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will release some of the pres-sure on the affected seat belt.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM44


45

!!

AIRBAG

CAUTION:o Because the sensor that activates

the SRS airbag is connected withpre-tensioner seat belt, the SRSairbag warning light on theinstrument panel will illuminatefor approximately 6 seconds af-ter the ignition key has beenturned to the "ON" position, andthen it should turn off.

o If pre-tensioner seat belt is notworking properly, this warninglight will illuminate even if thereis no malfunction of the SRSairbag. If the SRS airbag warninglight does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to "ON",or if it blinks for a second andremains illuminated after illumi-nating for approximately 6 sec-onds, or if it illuminates while thevehicle is being driven, pleasehave an authorized Hyundai dealerinspect the pre-tensioner seat beltor SRS airbag system as soon aspossible.

WARNING:o Pre-tensioners are designed to

operate only one time. After acti-vation, pre-tensioner seat beltsmust be replaced. All seat belts,of any type, should always bereplaced after they have beenworn during a collision.

o The pre-tensioner seat belt as-sembly mechanisms become hotduring activation. Do not touchthe pre-tensioner seat belt as-semblies for several minutes af-ter they have been activated.

o Do not attempt to inspect or re-place the pre-tensioner seat beltsyourself. This must be done byan authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not strike the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies.

o Do not attempt to service or repairthe pre-tensioner seat belt systemin any manner.

o Improper handling of the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies, andfailure to heed the warnings not tostrike, modify, inspect, replace,service or repair the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies may lead toimproper operation or inadvertentactivation and serious injury.

o Always wear the seat belts whendriving or riding in a motor ve-hicle.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM45


46

B240D01TG-GAT

(If Installed)

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM

1. Driver's front airbag2. Passenger's front airbag3. Front side impact airbag4. Rear side impact airbag5. Curtain airbag

B240D01TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM46


47

!

passenger with additional protectionthan that offered by the seatbelt sys-tem alone, in case of a frontal impact ofsufficient severity.

NOTE:Be sure to read information aboutthe SRS on the labels provided onthe backside of the sun visor and inthe glove box.

WARNING:o As its name implies, the SRS is

designed to work with, and besupplemental to, the driver's andthe passenger's three point seatbelt systems and is not a substi-tute for them. Therefore, yourseat belts must be worn at alltimes while the vehicle is in mo-tion. The airbags deploy only incertain frontal impact conditionssevere enough to likely causesignificant injury to the vehicleoccupants.

B240A01NF-GAT

Driver's and Passenger's FrontAirbag (If Installed)

Your Hyundai is equipped with aSupplemental Restraint (Airbag) Sys-tem. The indications of the system'spresence are the letters "SRS AIRBAG" embossed on the airbag padcover in the steering wheel and the frontpassenger's panel pad above the glovebox.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbagsinstalled under the pad covers in thecenter of the steering wheel and thefront passenger's panel above the glovebox. The purpose of the SRS is toprovide the vehicle's driver or the front

B240A01TG

B240A02TG

Rear impact

o The SRS is designed to deploy theairbags only when an impact issufficiently severe and when theimpact angle is less than 30° fromthe forward longitudinal axis ofthe vehicle and will not deploy inside, rear or rollover impacts.Additionally, the airbags will onlydeploy once. Thus, seat beltsmust be worn at all times.

o Front airbags are not intended todeploy in side-impact, rear-im-pact or rollover crashes. In addi-tion, airbags will not deploy infrontal crashes below the deploy-ment threshold speed.

Side Impact

Rollover

Driver's Front Airbag

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM47


48

o The driver should sit back as far aspossible while still maintainingcontrol of the vehicle. If you aresitting too close to the airbag, itcan cause death or serious injurywhen it inflates.

o No objects should be placed overor near the airbag modules onthe steering wheel, instrumentpanel, and the front passenger'spanel above the glove box,because any such object couldcause harm if the vehicle is in acrash severe enough to causethe airbags to deploy.

o If the airbags deploy, they mustbe replaced by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o Do not tamper with or discon-nect SRS wiring, or other com-ponents of the SRS system. Do-ing so could result in injury, dueto accidental firing of the airbagsor by rendering the SRS inopera-tive.

o Do not install a child restraint sys-tem in the front passenger seatposition. A child restraint systemmust never be placed in the frontseat. The infant or child could beseverely injured or killed by anairbag deployment in case of anaccident.

o Do not allow children to ride inthe front passenger seat. If olderchildren (teenagers and older)must ride in the front seat, makesure they are always properlybelted and that the seat is movedback as far as possible.

o For maximum safety protectionin all types of crashes, all occu-pants including the driver shouldalways wear their seat belts tominimize the risk of severe injuryor death in the event of a crash.Do not sit or lean unnecessarilyclose to the airbag while the ve-hicle is in motion.

o The SRS airbag system must de-ploy very rapidly to provide pro-tection in a crash. If an occupantis out of position because of notwearing a seat belt, the airbagmay forcefully contact the occu-pant causing serious or fatal in-juries.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM48


49

B240B03L

Upon deployment, tear seams moldeddirectly into the pad covers will sepa-rate under pressure from the expan-sion of the airbags. Further opening ofthe covers then allows full inflation ofthe airbags.

B240B02L

The SRS service reminder indicator(SRI) on the instrument panel will illu-minate for about 6 seconds after theignition key is turned to the "ON" posi-tion or after the engine is started, afterwhich the SRI should go out.

The airbag modules are located both inthe center of the steering wheel and inthe front passenger's panel above theglove box. When the SRSCM detects aconsiderable impact to the front of thevehicle, it will automatically deploy theairbags.

A fully inflated airbag in combinationwith a properly worn seat belt slowsthe driver's or the passenger's forwardmotion, thus reducing the risk of heador chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbagimmediately starts deflating, enablingthe driver to maintain forward visibility.

B240B01NF-GAT

SRS Components and Functions

The SRS consists of the following com-ponents:

- Driver's Front Airbag Module- Passenger's Front Airbag Module- Knee bolster- SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)- SRS Control Module (SRSCM)

The SRSCM continually monitors allelements while the ignition is "ON" todetermine if a frontal or near-frontalimpact is severe enough to requireairbag deployment.

B240B01L

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM49


50

!

However, the fine dust generatedduring airbag deployment maycause skin irritation. Wash allexposed skin areas thoroughlywith lukewarm water and a mildsoap after an accident in whichthe airbags were deployed.

o The SRS can function only whenthe ignition key is in the "ON"position.If the SRS is not working prop-erly,(1)The SRS SRI does not come

on when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position orafter the engine is started.

(2)The SRS SRI blinks for a sec-ond and remains on after illu-minating for about 6 secondswhen the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position or afterhe engine is started.

(3)The SRS SRI illuminates whiledriving.

If this occurs, have your vehicleimmediately inspected by yourHyundai dealer.

Passenger's Front Airbag

B240B05L

freshener onto these areas (Instru-ment cluster, instrument panel pador air ventilator), it may damagethese parts. If the liquid from airfreshener does leak onto theseareas, wash them with water im-mediately.

WARNING:o When the SRS is activated, there

may be a loud noise and fine dustwill be released throughout thevehicle. These conditions arenormal and are not hazardous.

CAUTION:o Do not install or place any acces-

sories (drink holder, cassetteholder, sticker, etc.) on the frontpassenger's panel above theglove box in a vehicle with apassenger's front airbag. Such ob-jects may become dangerous pro-jectiles and cause injury if thepassenger's front airbag inflates.

o When installing a container ofliquid air freshener inside a ve-hicle, do not place it near theinstrument cluster nor on the in-strument panel pad surface. Ifthere is any leakage from the air

B240B01TG

Passenger's Front Airbag

!

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM50


51

B990A01TG-GAT

Passenger's Front Airbag ON/OFF Switch (If Installed)

B990A01TG

The passenger's front airbag can bedeactivated by the passenger's frontairbag ON/OFF switch (1) if a childrestraint is installed on the frontpassenger's seat or if the frontpassenger's seat is unoccupied by aperson.To ensure the safety of your child, thepassenger's front airbag must be de-activated when it should be necessaryto install a rearward facing child seaton the front passenger seat in excep-tional circumstances.

To deactivate or reactivate thepassenger's front airbag

To deactivate the passenger's frontairbag, insert the master key into thepassenger's front airbag ON/OFF switchon the right side of the crash pad andturn it to the "OFF" position. Thepassenger's front airbag OFF indicatorwill illuminate and stay on until thepassenger's front airbag is reactivated.

To reactivate the passenger's frontairbag, insert the master key into thepassenger's front airbag ON/OFFswitch and turn it to the "ON" position.The passenger's front airbag OFF in-dicator will go out.

(1)

o Before you replace a fuse or dis-connect a battery terminal, turnthe ignition key to the "LOCK"position or remove the ignitionkey. Never remove or replace theair bag related fuse(s) when theignition key is in the "ON" posi-tion. Failure to heed this warningwill cause the SRS SRI to illumi-nate.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM51


52

! WARNING:o The driver is responsible for the

proper position of thepassenger's front airbag ON/OFFswitch.

o Deactivate the front passenger'sairbag only when the ignitionswitch is switched off, or the mal-function may occur in the SRSCM(SRS Control Module). And theremay be a danger that the driver'sand/or passenger's front and/orside and curtain airbag may fail totrigger, or not trigger correctlyduring a collision.

o Never install a rearward facingchild seat on the frontpassenger's seat. The infant orchild could be severely injuredor killed by an airbag deploy-ment in case of an accident.

o If the SRS airbag warning lightdoes not illuminate when the ig-nition key is turned to the "ON"position, or if it illuminates whilethe vehicle is being driven, havean authorized Hyundai dealer in-spect the passenger's frontairbag ON/OFF switch, pre-tensioner seat belt and the SRSairbag system as soon as pos-sible.

! CAUTION:o If the passenger's front airbag

ON/OFF switch is not workingproperly, the SRS warning lighton the instrument panel will illu-minate.And, the passenger's front airbagOFF indicator will not illuminate,the SRSCM(SRS Control Module)reactivate the passenger's frontairbag and the passenger's frontairbag will inflate in frontal im-pact crashes even if thepassenger's front airbag ON/OFFswitch is set to "OFF" position.If this occurs, have an authorizedHyundai dealer inspect thepassenger's front airbag ON/OFFswitch, the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem and the SRS airbag sys-tem as soon as possible.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM52


53

! WARNING:o The side impact airbag is supple-

mental to the driver's and thepassenger's seat belt systemsand is not a substitute for them.Therefore your seat belts mustbe worn at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

B990B01TGSide airbag sensor

B990B01TG-GAT

Side Impact Airbag (If Installed)

Your Hyundai is equipped with a sideimpact airbag in each seat. The pur-pose of the airbag is to provide thevehicle's driver and passengers withadditional protection than that offeredby the seat belt alone. The side impactairbags are designed to deploy onlyduring certain side impact collisions,depending on the crash severity, angle,speed and point of impact. The sideimpact airbags are not designed todeploy in all side impact situations,collisions from the front or rear of thevehicle or in most rollover situations.

B990B02LZ

o Even though your vehicle isequipped with the passenger'sairbag ON/OFF switch, do not in-stall a child restraint system in thefront passenger's seat. A child re-straint system must never beplaced in the front seat. Childrenwho are too large for child re-straint systems should alwaysoccupy the rear seat and use theavailable lap/shoulder belts. Chil-dren are afforded the most safetyin the event of an accident whenthey are restrained by a properrestraint system in the rear seat.

o As soon as deactivation is nolonger needed, reactivate thefront passenger's airbag.

Important Safety Notes on theSide Impact Airbag system

Following is a number of safety pointsconcerning this system which shouldalways be observed to ensure risk ofinjury is reduced in an accident.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM53


54

B990C01JM-GAT

Curtain Airbag (If Installed)

Curtain airbags are located along bothsides of the roof rails above the frontand rear doors.They are designed to help protect theheads of the front seat occupants andthe rear outboard seat occupants incertain side impact collisions.

The curtain airbags are designed todeploy only during certain side impactcollisions, depending on the crash se-verity, angle, speed and impact. Thecurtain airbags are not designed todeploy in all side impact situations,collisions from the front or rear of thevehicle or in most rollover situations.

HLZ2051

Curtain Airbag

o Do not place any objects (an um-brella, bag, etc.) between the frontdoor and the front seat. Such ob-jects may become dangerous pro-jectiles and cause injury if thesupplemental side impact air baginflates.

o To prevent unexpected deploy-ment of the side impact air bagthat may result in personal injury,avoid impact to the side airbagsensor when the ignition key ison.

The airbags deploy only in certainside impact conditions severeenough to cause significant injuryto the vehicle occupants.

o For best protection from the sideairbag system and to avoid beinginjured by the deploying side im-pact airbag, each seat occupantsshould sit in an upright positionwith the seat belt properly fas-tened. The driver's hands shouldbe placed on the steering wheel atthe 9:00 and 3:00 positions. Thepassenger's arms and handsshould be placed on their laps.

o Do not use any accessory seatcovers.

o Use of seat covers could reduceor prevent the effectiveness ofthe system.

o Do not install any accessories onthe side or near the side impactairbag.

o Do not use excessive force on theside of the seat.

o Do not place any objects over theairbag or between the airbag andyourself.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM54


55

o The built in coat hooks shouldonly be used for light weight cloth-ing, ensure that pockets are free ofany heavy or sharp objects. Whenusing coat hooks, do not hangclothes on coat hangers.

o The space between the occupantand the curtain airbag must neverbe occupied by children, passen-gers or pets. Occupants shouldnever lean out or have any parts oftheir body protruding from thewindow while the engine is run-ning.

o Do not move the sun visor out tocover the side window if there isan item attached to it such asgarage door remote control, pens,air fresheners or the like. Theseobjects may cause injury if theCurtain Airbag is deployed.

o Where sun blinds are fitted to therear doors, these must not ob-struct or impair the airbag in anyway.

o Do not install any accessories orchildren’s toys in the CurtainAirbag deployment zones, as thismay impair the operation of thesystem or throw parts of them intothe vehicle cabin causing injury tooccupants if the system is de-ployed.

o To maintain the integrity of theCurtain Airbag system, any work,removal or installation of theairbag and associated compo-nents (such as roof lining and sidetrims) should always be performedby an authorized Hyundai dealer.

! WARNING:o Before installing child restraints ,

always refer to “Child RestraintSystem” to ensure correct instal-lation and occupant protection ismaximized.

o Make sure that the occupant doesnot have any body parts (head,arms & legs) protruding outsidethe restraining system. If an inflat-ing airbag was to strike an infantchild on the head, it may causeserious injury.

o Ensure the opening for the Cur-tain Airbag System remains unob-structed at all times, so that theairbags can inflate properly ifneeded.

Important Safety Notes for Cur-tain Airbag Systems

Following is a number of safety pointsconcerning this system which shouldalways be observed to ensure risk ofinjury is reduced in an accident.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM55


56

!

o Modification to SRS componentsor wiring, including the additionof any kind of badges to the padcovers or modifications to thebody structure, can adverselyaffect SRS performance and leadto possible injury.

o For cleaning the airbag pad cov-ers, use only a soft, dry cloth orone which has been moistenedwith plain water. Solvents orcleaners could adversely affectthe airbag covers and properdeployment of the system.

o No objects should be placed overor near the airbag modules onthe steering wheel, instrumentpanel, and the front passenger'spanel above the glove box, be-cause any such object couldcause harm if the vehicle is in acrash severe enough to causethe airbags to inflate.

o If the airbags inflate, they must bereplaced by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

B240C01HP

WARNING:o Extreme Hazard! Do not use a

rearward facing child restrainton a seat protected by an airbagin front of it!

o Do not install a child restraintsystem in the front passengerseat position.A child restraint system mustnever be placed in the front seat.The infant or child could be se-verely injured by an airbag de-ployment in case of an accident.

B240C01NF-GAT

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-freeand so there are no parts you cansafely service by yourself. If the SRSSRI (Service Reminder Indicator) doesnot come on, or continuously remainson, have your vehicle immediately in-spected by your Hyundai dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or anywork on the steering wheel must beperformed by a qualified Hyundai tech-nician. Improper handling of the SRSsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM56


57

o Do not tamper with or disconnectSRS wiring, or other componentsof the SRS system. Doing so couldresult in injury, due to accidentalfiring of the airbags or by render-ing the SRS inoperative.

o If components of the airbag sys-tem must be discarded, or if thevehicle must be scrapped, cer-tain safety precautions must beobserved. Your Hyundai dealerknows these precautions and cangive you the necessary informa-tion. Failure to follow these pre-cautions and procedures couldincrease the risk of personal in-jury.

o If you sell your vehicle, make cer-tain that this manual is transferredto the new owner.

o If your car was flooded and hassoaked carpeting or water on floor-ing, you shouldn't try to start theengine; have the car towed to anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM57


58 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260A01TG-GAT

Conventional Type

B260A01TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM58


59

1. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)2. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light3. Charging System Warning Light4. Passenger's Front Airbag OFF Indicator Light (If Installed)5. SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)6. Tachometer7. Turn Signal Indicator Lights8. High Beam Indicator Light9. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light

(If Installed)10. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light11. CRUISE Indicator Light (If Installed)12. Front Fog Indicator Light

13. Cruise SET Indicator Light (If Installed)14. Speedometer15. Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light16. Trunk Lid Open Warning Light17. Immobilizer Warning Light (If Installed)18. Coolant Temperature Gauge19. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)20. Door Ajar Warning Light21. Seat Belt Warning Light (Driver's Side)22. Odometer/ Trip Computer23. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light24. Low Fuel Warning Light25. Fuel Gauge

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM59


60

B260B01TG-GAT

Supervision Type

B260B01TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM60


61

1. Tachometer2. High Beam Indicator Light3. Turn Signal Indicator Lights4. Speedometer5. Front Fog Indicator Light6. Coolant Temperature Gauge7. Fuel Gauge8. Charging System Warning Light9. Passenger's Front Airbag OFF Indicator Light (If Installed)10. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light11. Seat Belt Warning Light (Driver's Side)12. Door Ajar Warning Light13. SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)

14. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)15. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light16. Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light17. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)18. CRUISE Indicator Light (If Installed)19. Trunk Lid Open Warning Light20. Immobilizer Warning Light (If Installed)21. Cruise SET Indicator Light (If Installed)22. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light23. Odometer/Trip Computer/Warning Text24. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light

(If Installed)25. Low Fuel Warning Light

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM61


62

B260F01A-AAT

High Beam Indicator Light

The high beam indicator light comeson whenever the headlights areswitched to the high beam or flashposition.

If your vehicle is equipped with thesupervision type cluster, the warningtext is double informed on the dot ma-trix display. The warning text comes onfor about 20 seconds. If you push theRESET button behind the steeringwheel, the warning text will go out.

CAUTION:If the low oil pressure warning lightstays on while the engine is running,serious engine damage may result.The low oil pressure warning lightcomes on whenever there is insuffi-cient oil pressure. In normal opera-tion, it should come on when theignition switch is turned on, then goout when the engine is started. If thelow oil pressure warning light stayson while the engine is running, thereis a serious malfunction.If this happens, stop the car as soonas it is safe to do so, turn off theengine and check the oil level. If theoil level is low, fill engine oil to theproper level and start the engineagain. If the light stays on with theengine running, turn the engine offimmediately. In any instance wherethe oil light stays on when the engineis running, the engine should bechecked by an authorized Hyundaidealer before the car is driven again.

!

B260G01TG

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal IndicatorLights

The blinking green arrows on the in-strument panel show the direction indi-cated by the turn signals. If the arrowcomes on but does not blink, blinksmore rapidly than normal, or does notilluminate at all, a malfunction in theturn signal system is indicated. Yourdealer should be consulted for repairs.

B260G01TG-AAT

Low Oil Pressure Warn-ing Light

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM62


63

!

Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. This meansyou still have braking on two wheelseven if one of the dual systems shouldfail. With only one of the dual systemsworking, more than normal pedal traveland greater pedal pressure are re-quired to stop the car. Also, the car willnot stop in as short a distance with onlyhalf of the brake system working. If thebrakes fail while you are driving, shiftto a lower gear for additional enginebraking and stop the car as soon as itis safe to do so.

B260H02A-GAT

Parking Brake/Low BrakeFluid Level Warning Light

WARNING:If you suspect brake trouble, haveyour brakes checked by a Hyundaidealer as soon as possible. Drivingyour car with a problem in either thebrake electrical system or brakehydraulic system is dangerous, andcould result in a serious injury ordeath.

Warning Light Operation

The parking brake/low brake fluid levelwarning light should come on when theparking brake is applied and the igni-tion switch is turned to "ON" or"START". After the engine is started,the light should go out when the park-ing brake is released.If the parking brake is not applied, thewarning light should come on when theignition switch is turned to "ON" or"START", then go out when the enginestarts. If the light comes on at anyother time, you should slow the vehicleand bring it to a complete stop in a safelocation off the roadway.The brake fluid level warning light indi-cates that the brake fluid level in thebrake master cylinder is low and hy-draulic brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or DOT 4 specifications should beadded. After adding fluid, if no othertrouble is found, the car should beimmediately and carefully driven to aHyundai dealer for inspection. If fur-ther trouble is experienced, the vehicleshould not be driven at all but taken toa dealer by a professional towing ser-vice or some other safe method.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:03 PM63


64

B260L01TG-GAT

Door Ajar Warning Light

The door ajar warning light warns youthat a door is not completely closed.

B260L01TG


B260J01TG

If your vehicle is equipped with thesupervision type cluster, the warningtext is double informed on the dot ma-trix display.The warning text comes on for about 20seconds. If you push the RESET but-ton behind the steering wheel, the warn-ing text will go out.

B260J01TG-GAT

Charging System Warn-ing Light

The charging system warning lightshould come on when the ignition isturned on, then go out when the engineis running. If the light stays on while theengine is running, there is a malfunctionin the electrical charging system. If thelight comes on while you are driving,stop, turn off the engine and checkunder the hood. First, make certain thegenerator drive belt is in place. If it is,check the tension of the belt.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM64


65

B260S01TG-GAT

Low Windshield WasherFluid Level Warning Light

The low windshield washer fluid warn-ing light comes on when the washerfluid reservoir is approaching empty.When it comes on, add washer fluid atyour earliest opportunity.

B260S01TG


B260K01TG-AAT

Trunk Lid Open WarningLight

This light remains on unless the trunklid is completely closed and latched.

B260K01TG

B260M01TG-AAT

Low Fuel Level WarningLight

The low fuel level warning light comeson when the fuel tank is approachingempty. When it comes on, you shouldadd fuel as soon as possible. Drivingwith the fuel level warning light on orwith the fuel level below "E" can causethe engine to misfire and damage thecatalytic converter.

B260M01TG

If your vehicle is equipped with thesupervision type cluster, the warningtext is double informed on the dot ma-trix display. The warning text comes onfor about 20 seconds. If you push theRESET button behind the steeringwheel, the warning text will go out. If your vehicle is equipped with the

supervision type cluster, the warningtext is double informed on the dot ma-trix display. The warning text comes onfor about 20 seconds. If you push theRESET button behind the steeringwheel, the warning text will go out.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM65


66

B260E01TG-GAT

Seat Belt Warning Light(Except E.C)

The seat belt warning light blinks forabout 6 seconds when the ignition keyis turned from the "OFF" position to the"ON".

NOTE:You can find the front passenger'sseat belt warning light on the centerfascia panel.

User (Driver+Front Passenger) ConditionSeat Belt Warning Light

Seat Belt Ignition SwitchUnbuckled ON Stay on until buckled upBuckled ON Come on for 6 seconds

Unbuckled ON *1 Blink until buckled upBuckled →→→→→ Unbuckled ON Blink until buckled up*2

*1) When the ignition key is turned from "OFF" position to "ON" within 1 minute.*2) If the vehicle speed exceeds 9km/h, the seat belt chime also sounds for about

1~2 minutes.If the vehicle speed is below 9km/h, 1 minute later the seat belt chime alsosounds for about 1~2 minutes.

NOTE:o You can find the front passenger's seat belt warning light on the center

fascia panel.o If the driver's seat belt is operated in this order "unbuckled →→→→→ buckled →→→→→

unbuckled" within 9 seconds after the seat belt is buckled, the seat beltwarning light and chime will not activate.

o Although the front passenger seat is not occupied, the seat belt warninglight will illuminate for 6 seconds.

o The seat belt warning light could be operated when luggage is placed onthe front passenger seat.

The seat belt warning light and chime will activate to the following table.

B265E01TG-GAT

Seat Belt Warning Light and Chime(E.C only)

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM66


67

B260N01TG

B260B01JM-AAT

SRS (Airbag) ServiceReminder Indicator (SRI)

The SRS service reminder indicator(SRI) comes on for about 6 secondsafter the key is turned to the "ON"position or after the engine is started,after which it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRSis not working properly. If the SRI doesnot come on, or continuously remainson after operating for about 6 secondswhen you turned the ignition key to the"ON" position or started the engine, orif it comes on while driving, have theSRS inspected by an authorizedHyundai dealer.


B260A01Y-GAT

Front Fog Indicator Light

This fog indicator light comes on whenthe ignition key is turned to the "ON"position and the front fog light switch ison.

B260N01TG-AAT

Malfunction IndicatorLight (MIL)

This light illuminates when there is amalfunction of an exhaust gas relatedcomponent, and the system is notfunctioning properly so that the ex-haust gas regulation values are notsatisfied. This light will also illuminatewhen the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position, and then it will go out ina few seconds after the engine isstarted. If it illuminates while driving, ordoes not illuminate when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, takeyour car to your nearest authorizedHyundai dealer and have the systemchecked.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM67


68

!

B260P01TG-GAT

ABS Service ReminderIndicator (SRI)

When the key is turned to the "ON"position, the Anti-Lock Brake SystemSRI will come on and then go off in afew seconds. If the ABS SRI remainson, comes on while driving, or does notcome on when the key is turned to the"ON" position, this indicates that theremay be a problem with the ABS.If this occurs, have your vehiclechecked by your Hyundai dealer assoon as possible. The normal brakingsystem will still be operational, butwithout the assistance of the anti-lockbrake system.

WARNING:If the both ABS SRI and ParkingBrake/Low Brake fluid level warn-ing lights remain "ON" or come onwhile driving, there may be a prob-lem with E.B.D. (Electronic brakeforce distribution).If this occurs, avoid sudden stopsand have your vehicle checked byyour Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-sible.

CAUTION:If there is a malfunction of thepassenger's front airbag ON/OFFswitch, the passenger's front airbagOFF indicator will not illuminateand the passenger's front airbagwill inflate in frontal impact crasheseven if the passenger's front airbagON/OFF switch is set to the "OFF"position.If the passenger's front airbag OFFindicator will not illuminate whenthe passenger's front airbag ON/OFF switch is set to the "OFF" po-sition, have an authorized Hyundaidealer inspect the passenger's frontairbag ON/OFF switch and the SRSairbag system as soon as possible.

!B230T02NF-GAT

Passenger's Front AirbagOFF Indicator Light(If Installed)

The passenger's front airbag OFF in-dicator illuminates for about 4 secondsafter the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position or after the engine isstarted, and then it will go off in 3seconds.The passenger's front airbag OFF in-dicator also comes on when thepassenger's front airbag ON/OFFswitch is set to "OFF" position andturns off when the passenger's frontairbag ON/OFF switch is set to "ON"position.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM68


69

B265C01NF-GAT

Electronic StabilityProgram Indicator Lights(If Installed)

The electronic stability program indi-cators change operation according tothe ignition switch position and whetherthe system is in operation or not.They will illuminate when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, butshould go out after three seconds. Ifthe ESP or ESP-OFF indicator stayson, take your car to your authorizedHyundai dealer and have the systemchecked. See section 2 for more infor-mation about the ESP.

B260Q01NF-GAT

CRUISE Indicator Light(If Installed)

The cruise indicator light in the instru-ment cluster is illuminated when thecruise control ON/OFF switch on thesteering wheel is pushed.The indicator light does not illuminatewhen the cruise control ON/OFF switchis pushed again. Information about theuse of cruise control begins on page 1-111.

B260R01NF-GAT

Cruise SET IndicatorLight (If Installed)

The Cruise SET indicator light in theinstrument cluster is illuminated whenthe cruise control "COAST/SET" or"RES/ACCEL" switch is pushed. TheCruise SET indicator light does notilluminate when the cruise control"CANCEL" switch is pushed or thesystem is disengaged. To disengagethe cruise control system, refer to "Tocancel the cruise speed" on page 1-112.


B260P01TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM69


70 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

B270A01A-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNINGSOUND

The front disc brake pads have wearindicators that should make a high-pitched squealing or scraping noisewhen new pads are needed. The soundmay come and go or be heard all thetime when the vehicle is moving. Itmay also be heard when the brakepedal is pushed down firmly. Exces-sive rotor damage will result if the wornpads are not replaced. See yourHyundai dealer immediately.

B280A01TG-GAT

FUEL GAUGE

The needle on the gauge indicates theapproximate fuel level in the fuel tank.The fuel capacity is given is section 9.

NOTE:The " " symbol means the fuelfiller lid is placed on the left side ofthe vehicle.

B280A01TG

Conventional Type

Supervision Type

B260U01TB-GAT

Immobilizer WarningLight (If Installed)

This indicator light comes on for someseconds after the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position. At this time, youcan start the engine. The light goes outafter the engine is running. In case thislight goes out before you start the en-gine, you must turn to the "LOCK"position and restart the engine. In casethis light blinks for five seconds whenthe ignition key is turned to "ON" posi-tion, this indicates that the immobilizersystem is out of order. At this time,refer to the explanation of the Limphome procedure(See page 1-8) or con-sult to the Hyundai dealer.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM70


71

The needle on the engine coolant tem-perature gauge should stay in the nor-mal range. If it moves across the dial to"H" (Hot), pull over and stop as soon aspossible and turn off the engine. Thenopen the hood and check the coolantlevel (See "If the engine overheats" onthe page 3-4.) and the water pumpdrive belt . If you suspect cooling sys-tem trouble, have your cooling systemchecked by a Hyundai dealer as soonas possible.

B300A01A-GAT

SPEEDOMETER

Your Hyundai's speedometer is cali-brated in kilometers per hour or milesper hour.

B300A01TG

B300A02TG

Conventional Type

Supervision Type

!

B290A03A-AAT

ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURE GAUGE

WARNING:Never remove the radiator cap whenthe engine is hot. The engine cool-ant is under pressure and coulderupt and cause severe burns. Waituntil the engine is cool before re-moving the radiator cap.

B290A01TG

Conventional Type

Supervision Type

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM71


72

B310A01B-GAT

ODOMETER

The odometer records the total drivingdistance in kilometers or miles, and isuseful for keeping a record for mainte-nance intervals.It is normal for a new vehicle to havethe odometer indicating less than 50km.

NOTE:Any alteration of the odometer mayvoid your warranty coverage.

B310A01TG

Conventional Type

Supervision Type

CAUTION:The engine should not be raced tosuch a speed that the needle entersthe red zone on the tachometer face.This can cause severe engine dam-age and may void your warranty.

!

Odometer

Odometer

B330A01L-AAT

TACHOMETER

The tachometer registers the speed ofyour engine in revolutions per minute(rpm).

B330A01TG

RedZone

B330A02TG

Conventional Type

Supervision Type

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM72


73

NOTE:o If your vehicle is equipped with

the conventional type cluster, theunit is displayed only in the aver-age speed and the average fuelconsumption.

o Each unit can be displayed by theunit "MILE" according to region.

TRIPMETER

DISTANCE TO EMPTY

AVERAGE SPEED

DRIVE TIME

AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION

Pushing in the MODE switch when theignition switch is in "ON" positionchanges the display as follows;

B400B02TG

MODE SWITCH

TRIP COMPUTER

B400B01TG-GAT

Trip computer is a microcomputer-con-trolled driver information gauge thatdisplays information related to driving,such as estimated tripmeter, distanceto empty, average speed, drive timeand average fuel consumption on theLCD.

B400B01TG

Conventional Type

Supervision Type

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM73


74

B400B05TG

To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, pressthe TRIP switch.

TRIP A: First distance you have trav-eled from your origination pointto a first destination.

TRIP B: Second distance from the firstdestination to the final desti-nation.

1. Tripmeter

o This mode indicates the total dis-tance travelled since the last tripmeterreset. Total distance is also reset tozero if the battery is disconnected.

o Pressing the RESET switch for morethan 1 second when the tripmeter isbeing displayed clears the tripmeterto zero.

o The meter's working range is from 0to 999.9 km (999.9 miles).

B400B04TG

Conventional Type

Supervision Type

Conventional Type

Push in the RESET switch more than1 second to initialize the displayedinformation such as tripmeter, averagespeed, drive time and average fuelconsumption.

B400B03TG

RESET SWITCH

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM74


75

o When the distance to empty is lessthan 50 km (30 miles), the distanceto empty digits (----) will blink untilmore fuel is added.

NOTE:o The distance to empty can differ

from the actual tripmeter accord-ing to driving conditions.

o The distance to empty can varyaccording to the driving condi-tions, driving pattern or vehiclespeed.

B400B07TG

Conventional Type

B400B08TG

3. Average Speed

o This mode indicates the averagespeed from the starting of the engineto the ignition key "OFF".

o Average speed is reset to zero if thebattery is disconnected.

o To reset the average speed to zero (---), press the RESET switch for morethan 1 second.

o When you drive 0.5 km (0.5 mile)and less after resetting, the averagespeed will be displayed to '---'.

Conventional Type

Supervision Type

Supervision Type

2. Distance to Empty

o This mode indicates the estimateddistance to empty from the currentfuel level in the fuel tank.

o The trip computer may not registeradditional fuel if less than 6 liters(1.36 gallons) of fuel are added to thevehicle.

o When the battery has been rein-stalled after being discharged or dis-connected, drive more than 64km(40 miles) for an accurate distance toempty.

B400B06TG

Conventional Type

Supervision Type

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM75


76

o To reset the average fuel consump-tion to zero (--), press the RESETswitch for more than 1 second.

o When you drive 0.5 km (0.5 mile) andless after resetting, the average fuelconsumption will be displayed to '--'.

5. Average Fuel Consumption

B400B10TG

o This mode calculates the averagefuel consumption from the total fuelused and the distance since the lastaverage consumption reset.

o The total fuel used is calculated fromthe fuel consumption input.

o Average fuel consumption is reset tozero (--) if the battery is discon-nected.

Conventional Type

Supervision Type

B400B09TG

4. Drive Time

o This mode indicates the total timefrom the starting of the engine to theignition key "OFF" after resetting.When the RESET switch is pushed,it will be initialized to '0:00'.

o The drive time will be initialized to'0:00' after being displayed to '99:59'.

Conventional Type

Supervision Type

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM76


77

B340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

To indicate a lane change, move thelever up or down to a point where itbegins flashing.The lever will automatically return tothe center position when released.

HTG2108

B340C03L-AAT

Headlight Switch

To operate the headlights, turn the bar-rel on the end of the multi-functionswitch. The first position turns on theparking lights, sidelights, tail lights andinstrument panel lights. The secondposition turns on the headlights.

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON"position to turn on the headlights.

HTG2103

MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHTSWITCH

B340A01A-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAMSWITCHTurn Signal Operation

Pulling down on the lever causes theturn signals on the left side of the car toblink. Pushing upwards on the levercauses the turn signals on the rightside of the car to blink. As the turn iscompleted, the lever will automaticallyreturn to the center position and turnoff the turn signals at the same time. Ifeither turn signal indicator light blinksmore rapidly than usual, goes on butdoes not blink, or does not go on at all,there is a malfunction in the system.Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb orsee your Hyundai dealer.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM77


78

B340G01TG

NOTE:o Never place anything over sen-

sor located on the instrumentpanel. This will ensure better autolight system control.

o Don't clean the sensor using awindow cleaner.

o If your vehicle has window tint orother types of coating on thefront windshield, the AUTO lightsystem may not work properly.

Auto light sensorB340G01LZ-GAT

Auto Light (If Installed)

To operate the automatic light feature,turn the barrel on the end of the multi-function switch. If you set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", the taillights and headlights will be turned onor off automatically according to exter-nal illumination.

NOTE:Switch on car light manually infoggy, cloudy and rainy conditions.

HTG2104B340F01A-GAT

Daytime Running Lights(If Installed)

Your Hyundai is equipped with day-time running lights. The daytime run-ning lights are used to improve visibil-ity for oncoming traffic. Your vehicledaytime running lights are designed toremain on continuously when the en-gine is operating even though the head-light switch is in the "off" position.However, the daytime running lightswill be off while the parking brake isapplied.

Parking Light Auto Cut

If you do not turn the parking lights"OFF" after driving, the parking lightwill automatically shut "OFF" when thedriver's door is opened.To turn them "ON" again you mustsimply turn the ignition key to the "ON"position.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM78


79FOG LIGHT SWITCH

B360B01TG-GAT

Front Fog Light Switch

To turn on the front fog lights, place theswitch in the "ON" position. They willlight when the headlight switch is in thefirst position.

HTG2109

B340E01A-AAT

Headlight Flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the switchlever toward you, then release it. Theheadlights can be flashed even thoughthe headlight switch is in the "OFF"position.

HTG2107

B340D01A-AAT

High-beam Switch

To turn on the headlight high beams,push the lever forward (away fromyou). The High Beam Indicator Lightwill come on at the same time. For lowbeams, pull the lever back toward you.

HTG2106

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM79


80 WINDSHIELD WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCH

B350A01A-AAT

The windshield wiper switch has threepositions:

1. Intermittent wiper operation2. Low-speed operation3. High-speed operation

NOTE:To prevent damage to the wipersystem, do not attempt to wipe awayheavy accumulations of snow orice. Accumulated snow and iceshould be removed manually. Ifthere is only a light layer of snow orice, operate the heater in the de-frost mode to melt the snow or icebefore using the wiper.

HTG2101

B360A01TG-GAT

Rear Fog Light Switch(If Installed)

To turn on the rear fog lights, push theswitch. They will light when the head-light switch is in the first position andthe key is in the "ON" position.

B360A01TG

1

2

3

B360A01TG-R

Left-Hand Drive type

Right-Hand Drive type

B350B01B-GAT

Auto Wiper Operation(If Installed)

When the windshield wiper switch isplaced in the "AUTO" position, the rainsensor located on the upper end ofwindshield glass senses the amount ofrainfall and controls for the appropriatelength of the intervals between wipesappropriately.

NOTE:If there is heavy accumulation ofsnow or ice on the windshield glass,there will be a 10 minute waitingperiod prior to the operation of thewindshield wipers.

HTG2110

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM80


81

o In areas where water freezes inwinter, use windshield washerantifreeze.

Mist Wiper Operation

HTG2104-1

If a single wipe is desired in mist, pushthe windshield wiper and washer con-trol lever upwards.

B350B01O-GAT

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the windshield washer, pull thewiper/washer lever toward the steer-ing wheel. When the washer lever isoperated, the wipers automaticallymake two passes across the wind-shield. The washer continues to oper-ate until the lever is released.

NOTE:o Do not operate the washer more

than 15 seconds at a time or whenthe fluid reservoir is empty.

o In icy or freezing weather, besure the wiper blades are notfrozen to the glass prior to oper-ating the wipers.

HTG2103-1! WARNING:When the ignition switch is on andthe windshield wiper switch is placedin the "AUTO" mode, please usecaution in the following cases toavoid any hand injury:As the wiper system may automati-cally activate, the fingers or handmight be caught in the wiper.

o Do not touch the upper end of thewindshield glass facing the rainsensor.

o Do not wipe the upper end of thewindshield glass with a cloth.

o Do not put pressure on the wind-shield glass.

HTG2111Rain Sensor

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM81


82

B350C01O-AAT

Adjustable Intermittent WiperOperation

To use the intermittent wiper feature,place the wiper switch in the "INT"position. With the switch in this posi-tion, the interval between wipes can bevaried from approximately 1 to 18 sec-onds by turning the interval adjusterbarrel. This is also varied automati-cally depending on your road speed.

HTG2102

HEADLIGHT WASHER

B345G01TG-GAT

(If Installed)

HTG2103-1

The headlight washer is operated inconnection with the windshield washerlever. To operate the headlight washer,pull the wiper/washer lever toward thesteering wheel for about 1 second. It willoperate when the headight switch is inthe second position and the key is in the"ON" position.The washer fluid will be sprayed on tothe headlights for about 1 second.

NOTE:Check the headlight washers peri-odically to confirm that the washerfluid is being sprayed properly ontothe headlight lenses.

HEADLIGHT LEVELING DE-VICE SYSTEM

B340G01Y-GAT

(Manual Type) (If Installed)

To adjust the headlight beam level ac-cording to the number of the passengersand the loading weight in the luggagearea, turn the beam leveling switch.

B340G01TG-1

B340G01TG-1-R



TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM82


83


HAZARD WARNING SYS-TEM

B370A01A-AAT

B370A01TG

B370A01TG-R


Switch position00

1

2

3

Loading conditionDriver onlyDriver + front passenger

Full passengers(including driver)Full passengers (includ-

ing driver) + full trunkloading (or light trailerloading)

Driver + full trunk load-ing (or maximum trailerloading)

The higher the number of the switchposition, the lower the headlight beamlevel. Always keep the headlight beamat the proper leveling position, or head-lights may dazzle other road users.Listed below are the examples of properswitch settings. For loading conditionsother than those listed below, adjust theswitch position so that the beam levelmay be the nearest as the conditionobtained according to the list.

!

B340G01LZ-GAT

(Automatic Type) (If Installed)

It is automatically adjusted the head-light beam level according to the num-ber of the passengers and the loadingweight in the luggage area.And it offers the proper headlight beamunder the various conditions.

WARNING:If it is not working properly eventhough your car is inclined back-ward according to passenger's pos-ture, or the headlight beam is irradi-ated to the high or low position, haveyour vehicle inspected by yourHyundai dealer.Don't attempt to inspect or replacethe wiring yourself to prevent mal-function.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM83


84 FRONT/REAR WINDOW DE-FROSTER SWITCH

B380A01TG

With Automatic A/C

With Manual A/C

B380A02HP-AAT

(If Installed)

The front/rear window defroster is turnedon by pushing in on the switch. At thesame time, the front/rear window de-froster indicator light on the switch isturned on. To turn the defroster off,push in on the switch a second time.The front/rear window defroster auto-matically turns itself off after about 20minutes. To restart the defroster cycle,push in on the switch again after it hasturned itself off.

CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side of thefront/rear window glass with anabrasive type of glass cleaner oruse a scraper to remove the foreigndeposits from the inner surface ofthe glass as this may cause dam-age to the defroster elements.

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON"position for the front/rear windowdefroster to operate.

!The hazard warning system should beused whenever you find it necessaryto stop the car in a hazardous location.When you must make such an emer-gency stop, always pull off the road asfar as possible.The hazard warning lights are turnedon by pushing in on the hazard switch.This causes all turn signal lights toblink. The hazard warning lights willoperate even though the key is not inthe ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off,push in on the switch a second time.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM84


85CIGARETTE LIGHTER

B420A02A-AAT

For the cigarette lighter to work, the keymust be in the "ACC" position or the"ON" position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it allthe way into its socket. When theelement has heated, the lighter willpop out to the "ready" position.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressedin. This can damage the heating ele-ment and create a fire hazard.If it is necessary to replace the ciga-rette lighter, use only a genuine Hyundaireplacement or its approved equiva-lent.

B420A01TG

INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHTCONTROL (RHEOSTAT)

B410A01A-AAT

The instrument panel lights can bemade brighter or dimmer by turning theinstrument panel light control knob.

B410A01TG

B410A01TG-R



DIGITAL CLOCK

B400A01TG-GAT

There are three control buttons for thedigital clock. Their functions are:

H - Push "H" to advance the hour indi-cated.M - Push "M" to advance the minuteindicated.R - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00"to facilitate resetting the clock to thecorrect time.When this is done:Pressing "R" between 11 : 01 and 11 :29 changes the readout to 11 : 00.Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 11 :59 changes the readout to 12 : 00.Push the "R" button for 4 seconds todisplay a 12 or 24-hour clock.

B400A01TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM85


86 POWER OUTLET

B500D01TG-GAT

These supply 12V electric power tooperate electric accessories or equip-ment only when the key is in the "ON"or "ACC" position.

B500D01TG

CAUTION:Do not use electric accessories orequipment other than the Hyundaigenuine parts in the socket.

! ! CAUTION:o Use when the engine is running

and remove a plug from the poweroutlet after using the electric ap-pliance. Using when the enginestops or leaving the electric ap-pliance plugged in for manyhours may cause the battery todischarge.

o Do not use the power outlet toconnect electric accessories orequipment other than those de-signed to operate on 12 volts.

o Some electronic devices cancause electronic interferencewhen plugged into the poweroutlet. These devices may causeexcessive audio noise and mal-functions in other electronic sys-tems or devices used in yourvehicle.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM86


87DRINK HOLDER

HTG2183

The drink holder is located on the mainconsole for holding cups or cans. Thedrink holder can be opened by pushingat its top edge.

B450A01LZ-GAT

Front Drink Holder

ASHTRAY

B430A02NF-GAT

Front Ashtray

The front ashtray may be opened bypushing and releasing the ashtray lid.To clean the ashtray, the plastic recep-tacle should be removed by lifting theplastic ash receptacle upward and pull-ing it out. The ashtray light will onlyilluminate when the external lights areon.

B430A01TG

B440A01TG-AAT

Rear Ashtray

The rear ashtray may be opened bypulling the ashtray lid out. To clean theashtray, the plastic receptacle shouldbe removed by lifting the plastic ashreceptacle upward and pulling it out.

HTG2177

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM87


88

! CAUTION:Place the drink holder in its closedposition while not in use.

HTG2184

B450B01NF-GAT

Rear Drink Holder

The rear drink holder for holding cups orcans is located in the center of the rearseat armrest.

!

CAUTION:Place the drink holder in its closedposition when not in use.

WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink

holders. A spilled beverage that isvery hot can injure you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage interior trim and electri-cal components.

o Do not place objects other thancups or cans in the drink holder.The objects can be thrown out inthe event of a sudden stop or anaccident, possibly injuring the pas-sengers in the vehicle.

! ! WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink

holders. A spilled beverage thatis very hot can injure you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage interior trim and electri-cal components.

o Do not place objects other thancups or cans in the drink holder.These objects can be thrown outin the event of a sudden stop oran accident, possibly injuring thepassengers in the vehicle.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM88


89

B460B01TG-GAT

Opening the Sunroof System

If your vehicle is equipped with thisfeature, you can slide or tilt your sunroofwith the sunroof control buttons lo-cated on the overhead console.The sunroof can only be opened,closed, or tilted when the ignition switchis in the "ON" position.

B460B01TG

!

SEATBACK POCKET

B540B01E-GAT

HTG2042

The seatback pockets are located onthe backside of the front seats forholding papers.

SUNROOF

B460A02Y-AAT

(If Installed)Sun Shade

B460A01TG

Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a slid-ing sunshade which you can manuallyadjust to let in light with the sunroofclosed, or to block sunlight.

WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade whiledriving. This could result in loss ofcontrol and an accident that maycause death, serious injury, or prop-erty damage.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM89


90

!

Auto slide open

To use the auto slide feature, momen-tarily (more than 1 second) press theSLIDE OPEN button on the overheadconsole. The sunroof will slide all theway open. To stop the sunroof sliding atany point, press any sunroof controlbutton.

Manual slide open

Press the SLIDE OPEN button on theoverhead console for less than 0.5second.

Auto slide close

To close the sunroof, press the TILTUP button on the overhead console formore than 1 second.The sunroof will slide all the way close.To stop at the desired point, press anysunroof control button.

Auto Reverse

If an object or part of the body isdetected while the sunroof is closingautomatically, it will reverse direction,and then stop.Auto reverse function does not work ifa tiny obstacle is blocked between thesliding glass and the sunroof sash. Youshould always check that all passen-gers and objects are away from thesunroof before closing it.

WARNING:Be careful that someone’s head,hands and body are not trapped by aclosing sunroof.

Manual slide close

Press the TILT UP button on the over-head console for less than 0.5 second.

B460C01TG-GAT

Tilting the Sunroof System

Auto tilt up

To use the auto tilt feature, momen-tarily (more than 1 second) press theTILT UP button on the overhead con-sole. The sunroof will tilt all the wayopen. To stop the sunroof tilting at anypoint, press any sunroof control but-ton.

Manual tilt up

Press the TILT UP button on the over-head console for less than 0.5 second.

B460B01TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM90


91

!

!

WARNING:o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's

hands, arms or body are betweenthe sliding glass and the sunroofsash, as this could result in in-jury.

o Do not place your head or armsout of the sunroof opening at anytime.

CAUTION:o Do not open the sunroof in se-

verely cold temperature or whenit is covered with ice or snow.

o Periodically remove any dirt thatmay have accumulated on theguide rails.

o Do not press any sunroof controlbutton longer than necessary.Damage to the motor or systemcomponents could occur.

B460D01NF-GAT

Manual Operation of Sunroof

If the sunroof does not electrically op-erate:

1. Open the spectacle case.2. Remove the two mounting screws

of the front overhead console with a(+) driver.

HTG2029

Manual tilt down

To close the sunroof, press the SLIDEOPEN button on the overhead consoleand hold it until the sunroof is closed.

NOTE:After washing the car or after thereis rain, be sure to wipe off any waterthat is on the sunroof before oper-ating it.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM91


92

3. Insert the hexagonal head wrenchprovided with the vehicle into thesocket. This wrench can be found inthe vehicle's trunk or glove box.

4. Turn the wrench clockwise to openor counterclockwise to close thesunroof.

HTG2030

!B460E01TG-GAT

Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battery is dis-connected or discharged, or you usethe emergency handle to operate thesunroof, you have to reset your sunroofsystem as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ON"position.

2. Press the TILT UP button for morethan 1 second to tilt up the sunroofcompletely when the sunroof is fullyclosed. Then, release the button.

3. Press and hold the TILT UP buttononce again until the sunroof hasreturned to the original position ofTILT UP after it is raised a littlehigher than the maximum TILT UPposition. Then, release the button.

4. Press and hold the TILT UP buttonwithin 5 seconds until the sunroof isoperated as follows;

TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN →SLIDE CLOSE

Then, release the button.

CAUTION:If the sunroof is not reset, it may notoperate properly.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM92


93

B490A02NF-GAT

Interior Light

The interior courtesy light has two but-tons. The two positions are:

o DOOR

In the "DOOR" position, the interiorcourtesy light comes on when anydoor is opened regardless of the igni-tion key position. The light goes outgradually 30 seconds after the door isclosed.

B490A01TG

B485A01TG-GAT

Rear Map Light

Push in the map light switch to turn thelight on or off. This light produces a spotbeam for convenient use as a map lightat night or as a personal light for rearpassengers.

B485A01TG

B480B01TG-AAT

Front Map Light

Push in the map light switch to turn thelight on or off. This light produces aspot beam for convenient use as amap light at night or as a personal lightfor the driver and the passenger.

HTG2113

INTERIOR LIGHT

Without sunroof

With sunroof

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM93


94

o ON

In the "ON" position, the light stays onat all times.

CAUTION:Do not leave this button pressed foran extended period of time whenthe vehicle is not running.

!

!

SPECTACLE CASE

B491A03O-GAT

(If Installed)

The spectacle case is located on thefront overhead console.Push the end of the cover to open thespectacle case.

WARNING:o Do not keep objects such as sharp

or unsuitable things inside thespectacle case. Such objects canbe thrown out in the event of asudden stop or an accident, pos-sibly injuring the passengers inthe vehicle.

o Do not open the spectacle casewhile the vehicle is moving. Therear view mirror of the vehicle canbe blocked by an open spectaclecase.

HTG2182

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM94


95

B500A01TG-GAT

ACCESSORY BOX

The accessory box may be opened bypushing at its top edge (Type A) orpushing the knob downward (Type B).It is used for storing small articles.

B500A01TG

B500B01NF-GAT

Illuminated Glove Box

Opening the glove box will automati-cally turn on the light when the multi-function switch is turned to the firstposition.

NOTE:Information about use of the trunklid control button located in the glovebox is beginning on the trunk lidsection.

B541A01TG

Type A

B500A02TG

Type B

!

STORAGE BOX

B500A01TG-AAT

GLOVE BOX

WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, the glove box door should bekept closed when the car is in mo-tion.

o To open the glove box, pull on theglove box release lever.

o The glove box door can be locked(and unlocked) with the key.

HTG2178

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:04 PM95


96

B505A01NF-GAT

CENTER CONSOLE BOX

HTG2179

The center console box is used forstoring cassette tape or small articles.To use the center console box, pull upthe button and lift the lid to open it.

HTG2179-1

! WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, the center console box lidshould be kept closed when the caris in motion.

The outside rearview mirrors can beadjusted to your preferred rear vision,both directly behind the vehicle, and tothe rear of the left and right sides.The remote control outside rearviewmirror switch controls the adjustmentsfor both right and left outside mirrors.

NOTE:Before driving away, always checkthat your mirrors are positioned soyou can see behind you, both to theleft and right sides, as well as di-rectly behind your vehicle.

B510B01TG

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR

B510B01TG-AAT

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM96


97

!

CAUTION:o Do not operate the switch continu-

ously for an unnecessary lengthof time.

o Scraping ice from the mirror facecould cause permanent damage.To remove any ice, use a sponge,soft cloth or approved de-icer.

!

WARNING:Be careful when judging the size ordistance of any object seen in thepassenger side rearview mirror. Itis a convex mirror with a curvedsurface. Any objects seen in thismirror are closer than they appear.

To adjust the position of eithermirror:

1. Move the selecting switch to theright or left to activate the adjustablemechanism for the correspondingdoor mirror.

2. Adjust mirror angle by depressingthe appropriate perimeter switch asillustrated.

B510B02TG

! CAUTION:If the mirror is jammed with ice, donot adjust the mirror by force. Use anapproved spray de-icer (not radiatorantifreeze) to release the frozenmechanism or move the vehicle to awarm place and allow the ice to melt.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM97


98

The outside rearview mirror heater isactuated in connection with the front/rear window defroster. To heat theoutside rearview mirror glass, push inthe switch for the front/rear windowdefroster. The rearview mirror glasswill be heated for defrosting or defog-ging and will give you improved rearvision in inclement weather conditions.

B510D02HP-AAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEWMIRROR HEATER (If Installed)

B380A01TG

With Manual A/C

With Automatic A/C

Push the switch again to turn the heateroff. The outside rearview mirror heaterautomatically turns itself off after 20minutes.

B510C01TG-AAT

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REAR-VIEW MIRRORS (Manual Type)(If Installed)

To fold the outside rearview mirrors,push them towards the rear.The outside rearview mirrors can befolded rearward for parking in narrowareas.

B510C01TG

! WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outsiderearview mirrors while the vehicle ismoving. This could result in loss ofcontrol, and an accident causingdeath, serious injury or propertydamage.

CAUTION:If the mirror is jammed with ice, donot adjust the mirror by force. Use anapproved spray de-icer (not radiatorantifreeze) to release the frozenmechanism or move the vehicle to awarm place and allow the ice to melt.

!

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM98


99DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REAR-VIEW MIRROR

B520A01A-AAT

Manual type

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night inside rearview mirror. The "night"position is selected by flipping the tabat the bottom of the mirror toward you.In the "night" position, the glare ofheadlights of cars behind you is re-duced.

HTG2079

!

B510E01TG-AAT

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REAR-VIEW MIRRORS (Electric Type)

Both left and right outside rearviewmirrors can be folded by pressing theoutside rearview mirror folding switch.The outside rearview mirrors can befolded rearward for parking in narrowareas.

B510E01TG

CAUTION:o If the mirror is jammed with ice,

do not adjust the mirror by force.Use an approved spray de-icer (notradiator antifreeze) to release thefrozen mechanism or move thevehicle to a warm place and allowthe ice to melt.

o Do not attempt to fold the outsiderearview mirrors manually.If the mirrors are not completelyfolded out, the mirrors may bevibrate.

!

WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outsiderearview mirrors while the vehicle ismoving. This could result in loss ofcontrol, and an accident which couldcause death, serious injury or prop-erty damage.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM99


100

B520B02O-GAT

Electric type (If Installed)

The electric type day/night inside rear-view mirror automatically controls theglare of headlights of the car behindyou.

1. Pressing the button turns theauto-dimming function OFF whichis indicated by the green status indi-cator LED turning off.

2. Pressing the button again turnsthe auto-dimming function ON whichis indicated by the green status indi-cator LED turning on.

NOTE:The mirror defaults to the "ON" posi-tion each time the vehicle is started.

HTG2080

B530A01TG-GAT

B530A01TG

PARKING BRAKE

Always engage the parking brake be-fore leaving the car. This also turns onthe parking brake indicator light whenthe key is in the "ON" or "START"position. Before driving away, be surethat the parking brake is fully releasedand the indicator light is off.

o To engage the parking brake, de-press the parking brake pedal.

o To release the parking brake, de-press the parking brake pedal a sec-ond time.

NOTE:The parking brake pedal should bechecked periodically for properstroke.

TRUNK LID

B540A01S-GAT

Remote Trunk Lid Release

To open the trunk lid without using thekey, pull up the lid release lever.

HTG2014

HTG2017

To close, lower the trunk lid, then pressdown on it until it locks.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM100


101

!

B541A01TG-GAT

Trunk Lid Control Button

The trunk lid control button located inthe vehicle glove box is used to preventunauthorized access to the trunk.

Locking

To activate the trunk lock system sothat the trunk can only be opened withthe master key, perform the following:

1. Open the glove box.2. Set the trunk lid control button to

"OFF" position (not depressed).3. Close the glove box and lock the

glove box with the master key.

B541A01TG

When leaving the key with a parking lotattendant or valet, perform steps 1 to 3above and leave the sub key with theattendent. Sub key can start the engineand operate door locks only.

Releasing

To release the trunk lock feature, openthe glove box with master key and setthe trunk lid control button to "ON"position (depressed). In this positionthe trunk will open with trunk lid releaselever or transmitter. The trunk can neverbe opened with the sub key.

! WARNING:The trunk lid should be always keptcompletely closed while the vehicleis in motion. If it is left open or ajar,poisonous exhaust gases may en-ter the car and serious illness ordeath may result. See additionalwarnings concerning exhaustgases on page 2-2.

To be sure the trunk lid is securelyfastened, always check by trying to pullit up again.

WARNING:Doors and trunk should be keptlocked and keys be kept out of thereach of children. Parents also shouldteach their children about the dan-gers of playing in trunks.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM101


102

HTG2018

B540B02E-AAT

Trunk Lid Emergency Latch Re-lease

Your vehicle is equipped with a glow-in-the dark emergency trunk releaselever located inside the trunk. It willglow after the trunk is closed. Whenpulled, this lever will release the trunklatch mechanism and open the trunk.

! WARNING:o If a person is locked in the trunk,

pull the emergency trunk releaselever on the driver's side of theinside panel of the trunk to openthe trunk lid.

o HYUNDAI recommends that carsbe kept locked and keys be keptout of the reach of children, andthat parents teach their childrenabout the dangers of playing intrunks.

o Parents should teach childrenabout the emergency trunk re-lease lever in their vehicle andhow to open the trunk lid if theyare accidentally locked in thetrunk.

HTG2012

B540C01Y-AAT

To unlock using the key

To open the trunk lid, insert the key andturn it clockwise to unlock. The trunkcompartment light comes on when thetrunk lid is opened.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM102


103

! WARNING:o Fuel vapors are dangerous. Be-

fore refueling, always stop theengine and never allow sparks oropen flames near the filler area. Ifyou need to replace the filler cap,use a genuine Hyundai replace-ment part.If you open the fuel filler capduring high ambient tempera-tures, a slight "pressure sound"may be heard. This is normal andnot a cause for concern.Whenever you open the fuel fillercap, turn it slowly.

HTG2023

REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LIDRELEASE

B560A02NF-GAT

The fuel-filler lid may be opened frominside the vehicle by pushing on thefuel-filler lid opener located on the driverside door.

NOTE:If the fuel-filler lid will not openbecause ice has formed around it,tap lightly or push on the lid tobreak the ice and release the lid. Donot pry on the lid. If necessary,spray around the lid with an ap-proved de-icer fluid (do not useradiator anti-freeze) or move thevehicle to a warm place and allowthe ice to melt.

HTG2022

HIGH-MOUNTED REARSTOP LIGHT

B550A01A-AAT

(If Installed)

In addition to the lower-mounted rearstop lights on either side of the car, thehigh mounted rear stop light in thecenter of the rear window also lightswhen the brakes are applied.

B550A01TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM103


104

o Automotive fuels are flammable/explosive materials. When refuel-ing, please note the followingguidelines carefully. Failure tofollow these guidelines may re-sult in severe personal injury, se-vere burns or death by fire orexplosion.- Before refueling always note the

location of the Emergency Gaso-line Shut-Off, if available, at thegas station facility.

- Before touching the fuel nozzleor fuel filler cap, you shouldeliminate potentially dangerousstatic electricity discharge bytouching another metal part ofthe front of the vehicle, a safedistance away from the fuel fillerneck, nozzle, or other gassource.

- Do not get back into a vehicleonce you have begun refueling.Do not touch, rub or slide againstany item or fabric (polyester,satin, nylon, etc.) capable of pro-ducing static electricity. Staticelectricity discharge can ignitefuel vapors resulting in explo-sion.

If you must re-enter the vehicle,you should once again elimi-nate potentially dangerous staticelectricity discharge by touch-ing a metal part of the vehicle,away from the fuel filler neck,nozzle or other gasoline source.

- When using a portable fuel con-tainer be sure to place the con-tainer on the ground prior torefueling. Static electricity dis-charge from the container canignite fuel vapors causing a fire.Once refueling has begun, con-tact with the vehicle should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete. Use only portable fuelcontainers designed to carry andstore gasoline.

- Do not use cellular phonesaround a gas station or whilerefueling any vehicle. Electriccurrent and/or electronic inter-ference from cellular phones canpotentially ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. If you must useyour cellular phone use it in aplace away from the gas station.

- When refueling always shut theengine off. Sparks produced byelectrical components related tothe engine can ignite fuel va-pors causing a fire. Always in-sure that the engine is OFF be-fore and during refueling. Oncerefueling is complete, check tomake sure the fuel filler cap anddoor are securely closed, beforestarting the engine.

- Do not light any fire around agas station. DO NOT use matchesor a lighter and DO NOT SMOKEor leave a lit cigarette in yourvehicle while at a gas stationespecially during refueling.Automotive fuel is highly flam-mable and can, when ignited,result in explosion by flames.

- If a fire breaks out during refuel-ing, leave the vicinity of the ve-hicle, and immediately contactthe manager of the gas stationor contact the police and localfire department. Follow anysafety instructions they provide.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM104


105

!

HOOD RELEASE

B570A01NF-GAT

1. Pull the release knob to unlatch thehood.

2. Pull the secondary latch up and liftthe hood.

3. Raise the hood by hand.

B570A01TG

HTG2024-1

WARNING:o Always double check to be sure

that the hood is firmly latchedbefore driving away. If it is notlatched, the hood could fly openwhile the vehicle is being driven,causing a total loss of visibility,which might result in an acci-dent.

o Do not move the vehicle with thehood in the raised position, asvision is obstructed and the hoodcould fall or be damaged.

When closing the hood, slowly closethe hood and make sure it locks intoplace.

HTG2025

B560B01L-GAT

Manual Fuel Filler Lid Release

If the fuel filler lid cannot be openedusing the remote opener, a manualopener handle is located inside thetrunk on the left side. Open the fuelfiller lid by pulling on this handle asshown in the illustration.

HNF2022

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM105


106 SUN VISOR

B580A01NF-GAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with sunvisors to give the driver and front pas-senger either frontal or sideward shade.To reduce glare or to shut out directrays of the sun, turn the sun visordown.Vanity mirrors are provided on theback of the sun visor for the driver andfront passenger.

NOTE:The Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem (SRS) label containing usefulinformation can be found on theback of each sun visor.

B580A01TG

! WARNING:Do not place the sun visor in sucha manner that it obscures visibilityof the roadway, traffic or other ob-jects.

B500B01B-GAT

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Opening the lid of the vanity mirror willautomatically turn on the mirror light.

B580B01TG

B580C01JM-AAT

Sun Visor Extender

B580C01TG

Your vehicle is equipped with sun visorextenders that may be used when thevisor is in the side glass position.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM106


107HORN

B610A01L-GAT

Press horn pad on the steering wheel tosound the horn.

B610A01TG

B620A01S-AAT

A red light comes on when the front dooris opened. The purpose of this light is toassist when you get in or out and alsoto warn passing vehicles.

B620A01TG

FRONT DOOR EDGEWARNING LIGHT

TICKET HOLDER

B580C01LZ-AAT

The ticket holder is provided on thefront of the sun visor for holding atollgate ticket.

B580C02TG

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM107


108

B611A01Y-GAT

B611A01TG

REAR SEAT ARMREST

The rear seat armrest is located in thecenter of the rear seatback.

STEERING WHEEL TILT &TELESCOPIC

B600A01TG-GAT

Manual type

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Push the lever downward fully tounlock.

2. Adjust upward or downward and for-ward or backward to set the steeringwheel to the desired position.

3. After adjustment, securely tightenthe lever by pulling it upward.

HTG2076

REAR WINDOW CURTAIN

B265C01TG

B265C01TG-GAT

(If Installed)

Press the curtain switch to raise therear window curtain. To lower the rearwindow curtain, press the switch onceagain.

NOTE:o When the transaxle gear is shifted

into reverse "R", the rear windowcurtain will automatically lower.

o Be sure to lower the rear windowcurtain when the vehicle is mov-ing.

o Do not attempt to raise or lowerthe rear window curtain manu-ally.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM108


109CRUISE CONTROL

B660A01S-GAT

(If Installed)

The cruise control system providesautomatic speed control for your com-fort when driving on freeways, toll roads,or other noncongested highways. Thissystem is designed to function aboveapproximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

B660B01NF-GAT

To Set the Cruise Speed

1. Push the cruise control ON/OFFswitch. The "CRUISE" indicator lightin the instrument cluster will illumi-nate. This turns the system on.

2. Accelerate to desired cruising speedabove 40 km/h (25 mph).

B660B01TG

!

B600B01TG-GAT

Electric type (If Installed)

B600B01TG

To adjust the desired position of thesteering wheel, operate the adjustingswitch on the left side of the steeringwheel.

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steeringwheel while driving as this may re-sult in loss of control of the vehicleand serious injury or death.

!

! CAUTION:After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down to makesure it is locked in position.

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steeringwheel while driving as this may re-sult in loss of control of the vehicleand serious injury or death.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM109


110

B660D01NF-GAT

To Resume the Preset Speed

B660D01TG

The vehicle will automatically resumethe speed set prior to cancellation whenyou push the control switch "RESUME(ACCEL)" and release it to return (whentravelling above 40 km/h).

B660B02TG

3. Push the "SET" (COAST) switchafter you have set the vehicle speedat the desired speed.If the "SET (COAST)" switch is se-lected, the cruise "SET" indicatorlight in the instrument cluster willilluminate.

4. Remove your foot from the accel-erator pedal and the desired speedwill automatically be maintained.

5. To increase speed, temporarily de-press the accelerator pedal enoughfor the vehicle to exceed the presetspeed. When you remove your footfrom the accelerator pedal, the ve-hicle will return to the speed youhave set.

NOTE:If the vehicle speed decreases morethan 15 km/h (9 mph) below the setspeed or decreases below 40 km/h(25 mph), the cruise control systemwill automatically cancel the setspeed.

B660C01TG-GAT

To Cancel the Cruise Speed

To disengage the cruise control sys-tem, push the control switch "CAN-CEL".Additionally, the following actions willdisengage the system:

B660C01TG

o Depress the brake pedal.o Shift the selector lever to "N" posi-

tion.o Decrease the vehicle speed lower

than the memory speed by 15 km/h(9 mph).

o Decrease the vehicle speed to lessthan 40 km/h (25 mph).

o Release the cruise control ON/OFFswitch.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM110


111

B660F01TG-GAT

To Reset at a Slower Speed

B660B02TG

B660E01NF-GAT

To Reset at a Faster Speed

1. Push the control switch "RESUME(ACCEL)" and hold it.If the control switch "RESUME(ACCEL)" is selected, the cruise"SET" indicator in the instrumentcluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to desired speed andrelease the control switch. Whilethe control switch is held, the ve-hicle will gradually gain speed.

1. Push the control switch "SET(COAST)" and hold it. While thecontrol switch is pushed, the vehiclespeed will gradually decrease.If the "SET(COAST)" switch is se-lected, the cruise "SET" indicatorlight in the instrument cluster willilluminate.

2. When the desired speed is obtained,release the control switch.

If the control switch "RESUME(ACCEL)" is selected, the cruise "SET"indicator in the instrument cluster willilluminate.

! WARNING:o Keep the cruise control ON/OFF

switch off when not using thecruise control.

o Use the cruise control systemonly when traveling on open high-ways in good weather.

o Do not use the cruise controlwhen it may not be safe to keepthe car at a constant speed, forinstance, driving in heavy or vary-ing traffic, or on slippery (rainy,icy or snow-covered) or windingroads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads.

o Pay particular attention to thedriving conditions whenever us-ing the cruise control system.

o During normal cruise control op-eration, when the "SET" switchis activated or reactivated afterapplying the brakes, the cruisecontrol will energize after ap-proximately 3 seconds. This de-lay is normal.

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM111


112

2. TAPE mode

o Pressing the SEEK ( ) will play thebeginning of the next music seg-ment.

o Pressing the SEEK ( ) will startreplay at the beginning of the musicjust listened to.

3. CD (Compact Disc)/CDC(Compact Disc Changer) mode

o Press the SEEK ( ) once to skipforward to the beginning of the nexttrack.

o Press the SEEK ( ) once to skipback to the beginning of the track.

MUTE Switch

o Press the MUTE switch to disap-pear the sound.

o Press the MUTE switch again toreproduce the sound.

VOL ( / ) Switch

o Press the VOL ( ) switch to in-crease volume.

o Press the VOL ( ) switch to de-cease volume.

RADIO (FM1 → FM2 →AM) → TAPE → CD → CDC

SEEK ( / ) Switch

Press the SEEK switch 1 sec. or more.

1. RADIO mode

When the SEEK ( ) is pressed, theunit will automatically tune to the nexthigher frequency and when the SEEK( ) switch is pressed, it will automati-cally tune to the next lower frequency.

→

NOTE:Do not operate audio remote con-trol switches simultaneously.

MODE Switch

Press the MODE switch to select Ra-dio, Tape, CD (Compact Disc) andCDC (Compact Disc Changer).Each press of the switch changes thedisplay as follows:

AUDIO REMOTE CONTROLSWITCH

B610A01L-GAT

(If Installed)

The steering wheel audio remote con-trol switch is installed to promote safedriving.

B610A02TG

Without Cruise Control System

B610A03TG

With Cruise Control System

TGgene-1a.P65 6/16/2005, 3:05 PM112


113HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

1. Side Defroster Nozzle2. Side Ventilator3. Windshield Defroster Nozzle4. Center Ventilator5. Rear Ventilator

B710A01TG-GAT

B710A01TG

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM113


114 HEATING AND VENTILA-TION

B670A01NF-GAT

Rotary and Push Button Type

1. Temperature control2. Fan speed control3. Air flow control4. Air conditioning switch5. Air intake control switch6. Rear window defroster switch

HTG2125

B710B01TG-AAT

Ventilator

B710B01TG

To change the direction of the air flow,turn the control knob (1). To control theamount of air, turn the control knob (2).

B710B02TG

The vents are opened when the ventknob is moved to " " position. Thevents are closed when the vent knob ismoved to " ". Keep these vents clearof any obstructions.

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM114


115

B670B01A-AAT

Fan Speed Control(Blower Control)

This is used to turn the blower fan on/off and to select the fan speed.The blower fan speed, and thereforethe volume of air delivered from thesystem, may be controlled manuallyby setting the blower control betweenthe "1" and "4" position.

HTG2132

B670E02A-AAT

Temperature Control

This control is used to adjust the degreeof heating or cooling desired.

HTG2133

Cool Warm

B670D01TG-AAT

Air Flow Control

This is used to direct the flow of air. Aircan be directed to the floor, dashboardoutlets, or windshield. Five symbolsare used to represent Face, Bi-Level,Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost airposition.

HTG2126

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM115


116

Floor-Level

Air is discharged through the floorvents, windshield defroster nozzle, sidedefroster nozzle and side ventilator.

HTG2129

Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will causeair to be discharged through the facelevel vents and rear ventilator.

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the face vents,floor vents and rear ventilator. Thismakes it possible to have cooler airfrom the dashboard vents and warmerair from the floor outlets at the sametime.

HTG2128HTG2127

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM116


117

Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the wind-shield defroster nozzle, the floor vents,side defroster nozzle and side ventila-tor .If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected,the A/C will turn on automatically and"Fresh" mode will be activated.

Defrost-Level

Air is discharged through the wind-shield defroster nozzle, side defrosternozzle and side ventilator.If the "Defrost" mode is selected, theA/C will turn on automatically and"Fresh" mode will be activated to im-prove windshield defrosting.

HTG2131HTG2130

B670C01TG-AAT

Air Intake Control Switch

This is used to select fresh outside airor recirculation of inside air.

FreshRecirculation

With the " " mode selected, air en-ters the vehicle from outside and isheated or cooled according to the otherfunctions selected.With the " " mode selected, air fromwithin the passenger compartment isdrawn through the heating system andheated or cooled according to the otherfunctions selected.

B670C01TG

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM117


118

B700A02A-AAT

BI-LEVEL HEATING

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-levelheating controls. This makes it pos-sible to have cooler air from the dash-board vents and warmer air from thefloor outlets at the same time. To usethis feature:

o Set the air intake control switch tothe fresh air ( ) position.

o Set the air flow control at the bi-level( ) position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

o Set the temperature control between"Cool" and "Warm".

B700A01TG

NOTE:It should be noted that prolongedoperation of the heating system in" " mode will give rise to foggingof the windshield and side windowsand the air within the passenger com-partment will become stale. In addi-tion prolonged use of the air condi-tioning with the " " mode selectedmay result in the air within the pas-senger compartment becoming ex-cessively dry.

HEATING CONTROLS

B690A02S-AAT

For normal heating operation, set the airintake control to the fresh air ( )position and the air flow control to thefloor ( ) position.

For faster heating, the air intake con-trol switch should be set in the recircu-late ( ) position.

If the windows fog up, set the air flowcontrol to the defrost ( ) position.(The A/C will turn on automatically and"Fresh" mode will be activated.)

For maximum heat, move the tem-perature control to "Warm".

B690A01TG

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM118


119VENTILATION

B710A01A-AAT

DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

B720A02FC-AAT

Use the heating/ventilation system todefrost or defog the windshield.

To remove interior fog on the wind-shield:

o Set the air flow control to the defrost( ) position.(The A/C will turn onautomatically and "Fresh" mode willbe activated.)

o Set the temperature control to thedesired position.

o Set the fan speed control between"1" and "4" position.

B720A01TG

To operate the ventilation system:

o Set the air intake control switch atthe fresh air ( ) position.

o To direct all intake air to the dash-board vents, set the airflow controlto the face ( ) position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

o Set the temperature control between"Cool" and "Warm".

B710A02TGTo remove frost or exterior fog on thewindshield:

o Set the air flow control to the defrost( ) position.(The A/C will turn onautomatically and "Fresh" mode willbe activated.)

o Set the temperature control to warm.o Set the fan speed control to position

"3" or "4".

B720A02TG

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM119


120 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

B740A01S-AAT

Air Conditioning Switch(If Installed)

The air conditioning is turned on or offby pushing the A/C button on the heat-ing/air conditioning control panel.

HTG2135

NOTE:When the A/C is operated continu-ously on the floor-defrost level ( )or defrost level ( ), it may causefog to form on the exterior wind-shield. If this occurs, set the airflow control to the face level posi-tion ( ) and fan speed control tothe low position.

B730A01L-AAT

Operation Tips

o To keep dust or unpleasant fumesfrom entering the car through theventilation system, temporarily setthe air intake control at the po-sition. Be sure to return the controlto the position when the irritationhas passed to keep fresh air in thevehicle. This will help keep the driveralert and comfortable.

o Air for the heating/cooling system isdrawn in through the grilles justahead of the windshield. Care shouldbe taken that these are not blockedby leaves, snow, ice or other ob-structions.

o To prevent interior fog on the wind-shield, set the air intake control tothe fresh air ( ) position and fanspeed to the desired position, turnon the air conditioning system, andadjust temperature control to de-sired temperature.

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM120


121

B740B02A-AAT

Air Conditioning OperationCooling

To use the air conditioning to cool theinterior:

o Turn on the fan control switch.o Turn on the air conditioning switch

by pushing in on the switch. The airconditioning indicator light shouldcome on at the same time.


B740B01TG

o Set the temperature control to "Cool".("Cool" provides maximum cooling.The temperature may be moderatedby moving the control toward"Warm".)

o Adjust the fan control to the desiredspeed. For greater cooling, turn thefan control to one of the higherspeeds or temporarily select therecirculate ( ) position on the airintake control switch.

B740C01A-AAT

De-Humidified Heating

For dehumidified heating:

o Turn on the fan control switch.o Turn on the air conditioning switch.

The air conditioning indicator lightshould come on at the same time.


o Set the air flow control to the face( ) position.

o Adjust the fan control to the desiredspeed.

o For more rapid action, set the fan atone of the higher speeds.

o Adjust the temperature control toprovide the desired amount ofwarmth.

B740C01TG

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM121


122

B740D02Y-AAT

Operation Tips

o If the interior of the car is hot whenyou first get in, open the windows fora few minutes to expel the hot air.

o When you are using the air condi-tioning system, keep all windowsclosed to keep hot air out.

o When moving slowly, as in heavytraffic, shift to a lower gear. Thisincreases engine speed, which inturn increases the speed of the airconditioning compressor.

o On steep grades, turn the air condi-tioning off to avoid the possibility ofthe engine overheating.

o During winter months or in periodswhen the air conditioning is not usedregularly, run the air conditioningonce every month for a few min-utes. This will help circulate thelubricants and keep your system inpeak operating condition.

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM122


123AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM

B970A01Y-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an auto-matic heating and cooling control sys-tem controlled by simply setting thedesired temperature.

B970B01TG-GAT

Heating and Cooling Controls

1. Temperature Control Switch(Driver's side)

2. Defroster Switch3. Front/Rear Window Defroster

Switch4. Blower Fan Control Switch5. Air Intake Control Switch6. Air Quality System Switch7. Temperature Control Switch

(Front passenger's side)

B970B01TG

8. Display Window (Driver's side)9. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch10.OFF Switch11.Air Flow Control Switch12.Air Conditioning Switch13.Dual Temperature Control Selec-

tion Switch14.Display Window

(Front passenger's side)

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM123


124

2. Push the "TEMP" button to set thedesired temperature.The temperature will increase to themaximum 32 °C(90 °F) by pushingon the button. Each push of thebutton will cause the temperature toincrease by 0.5 °C(1 °F).The temperature will decrease to theminimum 17 °C(62 °F) by pushing onthe button. Each push of the buttonwill cause the temperature to de-crease by 0.5 °C(1 °F).

NOTE:If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, the temperature modewill reset to 23 °C (73 °F).

The FATC (Full Automatic Tempera-ture Control) system automatically con-trols the heating and cooling by doingas follows:

1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indi-cator light will illuminate confirmingthat the Face, Floor and/or Bi-Levelmodes as well as the blower speedand, air conditioner will be controlledautomatically.

Photo sensor

HTG2140

B970C01TG-GAT

Automatic Operation

NOTE:Never place things over the sensorwhich is located on the instrumentpanel to ensure better control of theheating and cooling system.

B970C01TG

HTG2095-1

This is a normal condition and youcan adjust the temperature modefrom Centigrade to Farenheit as fol-lows;Press the DUAL button 3 secondsor more with the MODE button helddown. The display shows that theunit of temperature is adjusted toCentigrade or Fahrenheit.( C → → → → → F or F → → → → → C)

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM124


125

B980B01Y-AAT

Fan Speed Control SwitchB980A01Y-AAT

MANUAL OPERATION

The heating and cooling system can becontrolled manually as well as by push-ing buttons other than the "AUTO" but-ton. At this state, the system sequen-tially works according to the order ofbuttons selected.The function of the buttons which arenot selected will be controlled automati-cally.Press the "AUTO" button in order toconvert to automatic control of the sys-tem.

The fan speed can be set to the desiredspeed by pressing the appropriate fanspeed control button. The higher the fanspeed is, the more air is delivered.Pressing the "OFF" button turns off thefan.

B980B01TG

B670C01TG-AAT

Air Intake Control Switch

This is used to select fresh outside airor recirculate inside air.To change the air intake control mode,(Fresh mode, Recirculation mode) pushthe control button.

FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicatorlight on the button goes off when the airintake control is in fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : Theindicator light on the button is illumi-nated when the air intake control is inrecirculation mode.

HTG2144

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM125


126

With the "Fresh" mode selected, airenters the vehicle from the outside andis heated or cooled according to thefunction selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected,and air from within the passenger com-partment will be drawn through the heat-ing system and heated or cooled ac-cording to the function selected.

NOTE:It should be noted that prolongedoperation of the heating in "recircu-lation" mode will give rise to foggingof the windshield and side windowsand the air within the passenger com-partment will become stale. In addi-tion, prolonged use of the air condi-tioning with the "Recirculation"mode selected may result in the airwithin the passenger compartmentbecoming excessively dry.

HTG2145

This is used to prevent from enteringthe exhaust gas automatically.Press the ( ) button to activate the "AirQuality Control System". To deactivatethe system, press the ( ) button againor air intake control button, or set themode to the defrost ( ) or floor-defrost( ) position.

B980C01LZ-GAT

Air Quality Control SystemCAUTION:

If the windows fog up with the Recir-culation or A.Q.S mode selected, setthe air intake control to the Fresh airposition or A.Q.S control to "OFF".

!

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM126


127

B980D01TG-AAT

Heating and Cooling System OffB740A01LZ-AAT

Air Conditioning Switch

The air conditioning is turned on or offby pushing the A/C button on the heat-ing/air conditioning control panel.

HTG2147

When pushing the "OFF" button, all ofthe A/C function will go off except theair flow control and air intake control.

HTG2148

B985A01LZ-GAT

Dual Temperature ControlSelection Switch

Adjusting the driver and passengerside temperature individually

Press the DUAL button to operate thedriver and passenger side temperatureindividually (The indicator light on thebutton is illuminated).

Adjusting the driver and passengerside temperature equally

Press the DUAL button again to deac-tivate DUAL mode (The indicator lighton the button goes off). The passengerside temperature will be set to the sameas the driver side temperature.

HTG2149

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM127


128

HTG2128

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the face vents,floor vents and rear ventilator. Thismakes it possible to have cooler airfrom the dashboard vents and warmerair from the floor outlets at the sametime.

HTG2127

Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will causeair to be discharged through the facelevel vents and rear ventilator.

B980E01TG-GAT

Air Flow Control

B980E01TG

This is used to direct the flow of air. Aircan be directed to the floor, dashboardoutlets, or windshield. Four symbolsare used to represent Face, Bi-Level,Floor and Floor-Defrost air position.

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM128


129

Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the wind-shield defroster nozzle, the floor vents,side defroster nozzle and side ventila-tor .If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected,the A/C will turn on automatically and"Fresh" mode will be activated.

B980C01TG-GAT

Defrost Switch

When the "Defrost" button is pressed,the " " mode will be automaticallyselected and the air will be dischargedthrough the windshield defrost nozzle,side defroster nozzle and side ventila-tor. If the "Defrost" mode is selected,the A/C will turn on automatically and"Fresh" mode will be activated to im-prove windshield defrosting. To assistin defrosting, the air conditioning willoperate if ambient temperature is higherthan 3°C and automatically turns off ifthe ambient temperature drops below0°C in manual operation.

B980C01TGFloor-Level

Air is discharged through the floor vents,windshield defroster nozzle, side de-froster nozzle and side ventilator.

HTG2129 HTG2130

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM129


130

In automatic operation, the air condi-tioning will operate if ambient tempera-ture is higher than 1.5°C and automati-cally turns off if the ambient tempera-ture drops below 0.6°C

DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

B725A01LZ-AAT

B725A01TG

Use the heating/ventilation system todefrost or defog the windshield:

To remove interior fog on thewindshield:

o Set the air flow control to the defrost( ) position. (The A/C will turn onautomatically and "Fresh" mode willbe activated.)

o Set the fan speed control to themaximum speed.

o Set the temperature control to thedesired position.

B725A02TG

To remove frost or exterior fogon the windshield:

o Set the air flow control to the defrost( ) position. (The A/C will turn onautomatically and "Fresh" mode willbe activated.)

o Set the fan speed control to themaximum speed.

o Set the temperature control to warm.

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM130


131AIR CONDITIONER FILTER(FOR EVAPORATOR ANDBLOWER UNIT)

B980G01TG-GAT

Auto de-humidified control(If Installed)

B760A01TG-GAT

(If Installed)

The air conditioner filter is located in theupper portion of the blower fan.It operates to decrease the amount ofpollutants entering the car.To replace the air conditioner filter,refer to the page 6-24.

B760A01TGInside of a vehicle

Evaporator coreFilter

Blower

Outside air

Inside air

CAUTION:o Replace the filter every 15,000 km

(10,000 miles) or once a year.If the car is being driven in severeconditions such as dusty, roughroads, more frequent air condi-tioner filter inspections andchanges are required.

o When the air flow rate is sud-denly decreased, it must bechecked at an authorized dealer.

!NOTE:When the A/C is operated continu-ously on the floor-defrost level ( )or defrost level ( ), it may causefog to form on the exterior wind-shield. If this occurs, set the air flowcontrol to the face level position ( )and fan speed control to the lowposition.

There is a humidity sensor on the cen-ter fascia panel. If it becomes veryhumid inside the car, the air condition-ing is turned on automatically to controlthe humidity.

B980G01TG

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM131


132

Ionosphere

B750A02L

AM receptionMountains

Buildings

Unobstructedarea

FM radio station

B750A03L

Ionosphere FM reception

B750A01L

Obstructed area Iron bridges

FM broadcasts are transmitted at highfrequencies and do not bend to followthe earth's surface. Because of this,FM broadcasts generally begin to fadeat short distances from the station.Also, FM signals are easily affected bybuildings, mountains, or other obstruc-tions. These can result in certain lis-tening conditions which might lead youto believe a problem exists with yourradio. The following conditions arenormal and do not indicate radio trouble:

AM broadcasts can be received atgreater distances than FM broadcasts.This is because AM radio waves aretransmitted at low frequencies. Theselong, low frequency radio waves canfollow the curvature of the earth ratherthan travelling straight out into theatmosphere. In addition, they curvearound obstructions so that they canprovide better signal coverage.

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio Works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcastfrom transmitter towers located aroundyour city. They are intercepted by theradio antenna on your car. This signal isthen received by the radio and sent toyour car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reachedyour vehicle, the precise engineeringof your audio system ensures the bestpossible quality reproduction. Howev-er, in some cases the signal coming toyour vehicle may not be strong andclear. This can be due to factors suchas the distance from the radio station,closeness of other strong radio sta-

tions or the presence of buildings,bridges or other large obstructions inthe area.

STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM132


133

B750B03Y-GAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio

When a cellular phone is used insidethe vehicle, noise may be producedfrom the audio equipment. This doesnot mean that something is wrong withthe audio equipment. In such a case,use the cellular phone at a place as faras possible from the audio equipment.

CAUTION:When using a communication sys-tem such a cellular phone or a radioset inside the vehicle, a separateexternal antenna must be fitted.When a cellular phone or a radio setis used with an internal antennaalone, it may interfere with thevehicle's electrical system and ad-versely affect safe operation of thevehicle.

!B750A04L B750A05L

o Station Swapping - As a FM signalweakens, another more powerfulsignal near the same frequency maybegin to play. This is because yourradio is designed to lock onto theclearest signal. If this occurs, selectanother station with a stronger sig-nal.

o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig-nals being received from severaldirections can cause distortion orfluttering. This can be caused by adirect and reflected signal from thesame station, or by signals from twostations with close frequencies. Ifthis occurs, select another stationuntil the condition has passed.

o Fading - As your car moves awayfrom the radio station, the signal willweaken and sound will begin tofade. When this occurs, we suggestthat you select another stronger sta-tion.

o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals orlarge obstructions between thetransmitter and your radio can dis-turb the signal causing static or flut-tering noises to occur. Reducing thetreble level may lessen this effectuntil the disturbance clears.

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM133


134

! WARNING:Don't use a cellular phone whenyou are driving. This could result inloss of control, and an accidentthat may cause death, serious in-jury, or property damage. You muststop at a safe place to use a cellularphone.

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM134


135

M445A01TG-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M445) (If Installed)

1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUMEControl Knob

2. BAND Selector3. TUNE Select Knob4. SEEK Select Button5. Best Station Memory (BSM)

Button6. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button7. Adjustment Mode Select

(A.MODE) Button8. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

AUDIO SYSTEM

M445A01TG

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM135


136

CLASSIC → POPS → ROCK → JAZZ →DEFEAT

M445B01TG-GAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob

o The radio unit may be operated whenthe ignition key is in the "ACC" or"ON" position. Press the knob toswitch the power on. The displayshows the radio frequency in theradio mode or CD/MP3 track in eitherthe CD/MP3 mode. To switch thepower off, press the knob again.

o Push the FM/AM or CD/MP3 to turnon that function without pushingPower ON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increasethe volume and turn the knob counter-clockwise to reduce the volume.

2. BAND Selector

Pressing the band selector FM/AMchanges the AM (MW, LW), FM1 andFM2 bands.The mode selected is shown on thedisplay.

3. TUNE (Manual) Select Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise to increasethe frequency and turn the knob coun-terclockwise to reduce the frequency.

4. SEEK Select Button(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the SEEK select button. Whenthe ( ) side is pressed, the unit willautomatically tune to the next higher

frequency and when the ( ) side ispressed, it will automatically tune to thenext lower frequency.

5. Best Station Memory (BSM)Button

When the BSM button is pressed thesix channels from the highest field in-tensity are selected next and stored inmemory. The stations selected arestored in the sequence frequency fromthe first preset key.

6. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-SIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and DE-FEAT MODE for the desired tone qual-ity. Each press of the button changesthe display as follows;

7. Adjustment ModeSelect (A.MODE) Button

Pressing the A.MODE button changesthe BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADERand BALANCE mode. The mode se-lected is shown on the display. Afterselecting the each mode, rotate theVOLUME control knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the bass, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the bass,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM136


137

!

MIDDLE Control

To increase the MIDDLE, rotate theknob clockwise, while to decrease theMIDDLE, rotate the knob counterclock-wise.

TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate theknob clockwise, while to decrease theTREBLE, rotate the knob counterclock-wise.

FADER Control

Turn the control knob clockwise toemphasize rear speaker sound (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated).When the control knob is turned coun-terclockwise, front speaker sound willbe emphasized (rear speaker sound willbe attenuated).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to empha-size right speaker sound (Left speakersound will be attenuated).

When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, left speaker sound will beemphasized (Right speaker sound willbe attenuated).

8. PRESET STATION Select But-tons

Six (6) stations for AM (MW, LW), FM1and FM2 respectively can be preset inthe electronic memory circuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of theradio. Then, by simply pressing theband select button and/or one of the sixstation select buttons, you may recallany of these stations instantly.To program the stations, follow thesesteps:o Press band selector to set the band

for AM (MW, LW), FM1 and FM2.o Select the desired station to be stored

by seek or manual tuning.o Determine the preset station select

button you wish to use to access thatstation.

o Press the station select button formore than two seconds. Beep soundwill be heard while depressing thebutton. You should then release thebutton, and proceed to program thenext desired station. A total of 24stations can be programmed by se-lecting one AM (MW, LW) and twoFM station per button.

o When completed, any preset stationmay be recalled by selecting AM,FM1 or FM2 band and the appropri-ate station button.

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to

the audio system. The playbackmechanism may be damaged ifyou spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio sys-tem, or the playback mechanismcould be damaged.

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM137


138

M445C01TG-GAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M445) (If Installed)- Compatiable with MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button2. TRACK UP/DOWN3. FF/REW Button4. REPEAT (RPT) Button5. RANDOM (RDM) Button6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button7. SCROLL8. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button9. CD EJECT Button10.SCAN11.FILE SEARCH Knob12.CHANGE DIRECTORY(DIR)

Button

M445C01TG

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM138


139

M445D01TG-GAT

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button

o Insert the CD with the label facingupward.

o Insert the CD to start CD playback,during radio operation.

o When a disc is in the CD deck, if youpress the CD button, the CD playerwill begin playing even if the radio isbeing used.

o The CD player can be used when theignition switch is in either the "ON" or"ACC" position.

o Push the CD button to turn on thatfunction without pushing Power ON-OFF control knob.

NOTE:o Do not stick paper or tape etc., on

the label side or the recordingside of any discs, as it may causea malfunction.

o The unit cannot play a CDR (Re-cordable CD) and CDRW(Rewritable CD) that is not final-ized. Please refer to the manual ofCDR/ CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CDRW software for more informa-tion on finalization process.

o Depending on the recording sta-tus, some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may notbe played on this unit.

2. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc cur-rentlybeing played can be selectedusing the track number.

o Press button once to skip forward tothe beginning of the next track. Pressbutton once to skip back to the be-ginning of the track.

3. FF/REW Button

If you want to fast forward or reversethrough the compact disc track, pushand hold the FF or REW button. Whenyou release the button, the compactdisc player will resume playing.

4. REPEAT (RPT) Button

o To repeat the track you are currentlylistening to, press the RPT button.To cancel, press it again.

o To repeat the music within currentlyplayed folder, press the RPT buttonfor more than one second. Then it willbe repeated in sequential order withinthe currently played folder. To can-cel, press it again. (MP3 CD only)

o If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed. This process willbe continued until you push the but-ton again.

5. RANDOM (RDM) Button

o For listen to the music in randomorder, press the RDM Button withbeep sound for more than one sec-ond. To cancel, press it again.

o For listen to the music within thecurrently played folder in randomorder, press the RDM Button withinone second. To cancel, press it againwithin one second. (If it pressed formore than one second, it will beplayed all in random order.) (MP3 CDonly)

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM139


140

6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button

When the CD player unit is operating,the desired track on the disc can bebookmarked by using the MARK but-ton.o Press the MARK button to bookmark

the desired track for more than onesecond. This will display the " "symbol on the LCD for five secondswith sequential number. To play thebookmarked tracks, press the MARKbutton within a second.

o Press the MARK button to erase thebookmarked tracks for more thanone second. This will erase the book-mark with beep sound.

7. SCROLL

When the CD is playing, you can scrollthe long file name more than 16 charac-ters (including the space and the fileextension) by pressing the SCROLLbutton. Press the SCROLL button forone second or more, and each16 char-acter of file name is displayed inEnglish only on the LCD at intervals of3 seconds.

8. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button


o To playback the first 10 seconds ofeach track in the selected folder,press the button within one second.If it pressed for more than one sec-ond, it will playback the first secondsof each track in the all folder withbeep sound. Press the button againwithin one second when reached thedesired track, the searching functionis released and the track you desiredwill be played in the selected folder.(MP3 CD only)

11. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNESelect Knob)

o You can skip the track by turning theFILE SEARCH knob to counterclock-wise or clockwise.

After selecting the desired track, pressthe FILE SEARCH knob to playbackthe track. If you do not press the FILESEARCH knob within 5 seconds, thefile searching function will be released.

12. CHANGE DIRECTORY(DIR)Button

o You can move through the folder bypushing the DIR button to up ( )and down ( ).


9. CD EJECT Button

When the ( )button is pressed with aCD loaded, the CD will eject. Forcing toeject : To force to eject a CD, press thisbutton for more than 3 seconds. (Dothis only when a CD is jammed and youcan not eject it in the normal way - e.g.)in case that you have inserted 2 CDs bymistake)

10. SCAN

o To playback the first 10 seconds ofeach track, press the button with thebeep sound for more than one sec-ond. Press the button again whenreached the desired track.

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM140


141

After moving the desired folder, pressthe FILE SEARCH knob to playbackthe first file in the selected folder.If you do not press the FILE SEARCHknob within 5 seconds, the folder search-ing function will be released.It is not operated in single folder.

NOTE:o To assure proper operation of the

unit, keep the vehicle interior tem-perature within a normal range byusing the vehicle’s air condition-ing or heating system.

o When replacing the fuse, replaceit with a fuse having the correctcapacity.

o The bookmarks are all erased whenthe car battery is disconnected orpower off. Therefore, all data willhave to be set again if this shouldoccur.

o This equipment is designed to beused only in a 12 volt DC batterysystem with negative ground.

o This unit is made of precisionparts. Do not attempt to disas-semble or adjust any parts.

CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor qual-

ity discs into the CD player asdamage to the unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coinsinto the player slot as damage tothe unit may occur.

o Do not place beverages close tothe audio system. The playbackmechanism may be damaged ifyou spill them.


o Driving on the off-roads or othervibrations may skip your compactdisc. Do not use the audio systemon off-roads as the discs could bescratched and damaged.

!

o Do not grip or pull out the discwith your hand while the disc isbeing pulled into the unit by theself loading mechanism. Thesecan cause disc scratching to oc-cur or trouble in the compact discplayer.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the player could notbe operated in recording way ofthe CD maker. When using thecompact disc player, genuine CDsare recommended.

o When driving your vehicle, be sureto keep the volume of the unit setlow enough to allow you to hearsounds coming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (in-cluding the speakers and tape) towater or excessive moisture.

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM141


142

M455A01TG-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M455) (If Installed)


2. BAND Selector3. TUNE Select Knob4. SEEK Select Button5. Best Station Memory (BSM)

Button6. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button7. Adjustment Mode Select

(A.MODE) Button8. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

M455A01TG

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM142


143

M455B01TG-GAT


o The radio unit may be operated whenthe ignition key is in the "ACC" or"ON" position. Press the knob toswitch the power on. The displayshows the radio frequency in theradio mode, the tape direction Indi-cator in the tape mode or CD/MP3track in either the CD/MP3 mode. Toswitch the power off, press the knobagain.

o Push the FM/AM, TAPE or CD/MP3to turn on that function without push-ing Power ON-OFF control knob.

VOLUME Control


2. BAND Selector

Pressing the band selector FM/AMchanges the AM (MW, LW), FM1 andFM2 bands.The mode selected is shown on thedisplay.

3. TUNE (Manual) Select Knob


4. SEEK Select Button(Automatic Channel Selection)




When the BSM button is pressed thesix channels from the highest field in-tensity are selected next and stored inmemory. The stations selected arestored in the sequence frequency fromthe first preset key.



7. Adjustment Mode Select(A.MODE) Button

Pressing the A.MODE button changesthe BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADERand BALANCE mode. The mode se-lected is shown on the display. Afterselecting the each mode, rotate theVOLUME control knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the bass, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the bass,rotate the knob counterclockwise.


TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM143


144

!

MIDDLE Control


TREBLE Control


FADER Control

Turn the control knob clockwise toemphasize rear speaker sound (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated).When the control knob is turned coun-terclockwise, front speaker sound willbe emphasized (rear speaker sound willbe attenuated).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to empha-size right speaker sound. (Left speakersound will be attenuated)

When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, left speaker sound will beemphasized (Right speaker sound willbe attenuated).


Six (6) stations for AM (MW, LW), FM1and FM2 respectively can be preset inthe electronic memory circuit.


Six AM and twelve FM stations may beprogrammed into the memory of theradio. Then, by simply pressing theband select button and/or one of the sixstation select buttons, you may recallany of these stations instantly.To program the stations, follow thesesteps:o Press band selector to set the band

for AM (MW, LW), FM and FM2.o Select the desired station to be stored

by seek or manual tuning.o Determine the preset station select

button you wish to use to access thatstation.

o Press the station select button formore than two seconds. Beep soundwill be heard while depressing thebutton. You should then release thebutton, and proceed to program thenext desired station. A total of 24stations can be programmed by se-lecting one AM (MW, LW) and twoFM station per button.

o When completed, any preset stationmay be recalled by selecting AM(MW, LW), FM1 or FM2 band and theappropriate station button.

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to

the audio system. The playbackmechanism may be damaged ifyou spill them.


TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM144


145

M455C01TG-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (M455) (If Installed)

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button2. TAPE EJECT Button3. AUTO MUSIC Search Button4. FF/REW Button5. REPEAT Button6. DOLBY Button7. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button

M455C01TG

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM145


146

M455D01TG-GAT

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button

o This allows you to play the reverseside of the tape by merely depress-ing the program button. An arrow willappear in the display to show tapedirection.

o Push the TAPE button to turn on thatfunction without pushing power ON-OFF control knob.

2. TAPE EJECT Button

o When the button is pressed with acassette loaded, the cassette willeject.

o When the button is pressed duringFF/REW mode, the cassette willeject.

3. AUTO MUSIC Search Button

Press the button to find the startingpoint of each song in a prerecordedmusic tape. The quiet space betweensongs (must have at least 4 sec. gap)can be accepted by the AUTO MUSICsearch button.

o Pressing the button will play thebeginning of the next music seg-ment.

o Pressing the button will start replayat the beginning of the music justlistened to.

4. FF/REW Button

o Fast forward tape winding startswhen the FF button is pressed duringPLAY or REW mode.

o Tape PLAY starts when the FF but-ton is pressed again during FF mode.

o Tape rewinding starts when the REWbutton is pressed during PLAY or FFmode.

o Tape PLAY starts when the REWbutton pressed again during REWmode.

5. REPEAT Button

o To repeat the track you are currentlylistening to, press the RPT button.To cancel, press again.

o If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.

This process will be continued until youpush the button again.

6. DOLBY Button

If you get background noise during tapePLAY, you can reduce this consider-ably by merely pressing the DOLBYbutton. If you want to cancel the DOLBYfeature, press the button again.




TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM146


147

CAUTION:o Do not insert anything like coins

into the player slot as damage tothe unit may occur.






o The preset station frequencies areall erased when the car battery isdisconnected. Therefore, all datawill have to be set again if thisshould occur.

o Do not add any oil to the rotatingparts. Keep magnets, screwdriv-ers and other metallic objects awayfrom the tape mechanism and head.





!

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM147


148

M455E01TG-GAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M455) (If Installed)- Compatiable with MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button2. TRACK UP/DOWN3. FF/REW Button4. REPEAT (RPT) Button5. RANDOM (RDM) Button6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button7. SCROLL8. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button9. CD EJECT Button10.SCAN11.FILE SEARCH Knob12.CHANGE DIRECTORY(DIR) Button

M455E01TG

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM148


149

M455F01TG-GAT

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button

o Insert the CD with the label facingupward.

o Insert the CD to start CD playback,during radio operation or cassettetape playing.

o When a disc is in the CD deck, if youpress the CD button the CD playerwill begin playing even if the radio orcassette player is being used.


o Push the CD button to turn on thatfunction without pushing Power ON-OFF control knob.

NOTE:o Do not stick paper or tape etc., on

the label side or the recordingside of any discs, as it may causea malfunction.

o The unit cannot play a CDR (Re-cordable CD) and CDRW(Rewritable CD) that is not final-ized. Please refer to the manual ofCDR/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CDRW software for more informa-tion on finalization process.

o Depending on the recording sta-tus, some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may notbe played on this unit.

2. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc cur-rently being played can be selectedusing the track number.

o Press button once to skip forward tothe beginning of the next track. Pressbutton once to skip back to the be-ginning of the track.

3. FF/REW Button

If you want to fast forward or reversethrough the compact disc track, pushand hold the FF or REW button. Whenyou release the button, the compactdisc player will resume playing.


o To repeat the track you are currentlylistening to, press the RPT button.To cancel, press it again.





o For listen to the music within thecurrently played folder in randomorder, press the RDM Button withinone second. To cancel, press it againwithin one second. (If it pressed formore than one second, it will beplayed all in random order.) (MP3 CDonly)

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM149


150


When the CD player unit is operating,the desired track on the disc can bebookmarked by using the MARK but-ton.o Press the MARK button to bookmark

the desired track for more than onesecond. This will display the " "symbol on the LCD for five secondswith sequential number. To play thebookmarked tracks, press the MARKbutton within a second.

o Press the MARK button to erase thebookmarked tracks for more thanone second. This will erase the book-mark with beep sound.

7. SCROLL

When the CD is playing, you can scrollthe long file name more than 16 charac-ters (including the space and the fileextension) by pressing the DOLBY but-ton. Press the DOLBY button for onesecond or more, and each16 characterof file name is displayed in English onlyon the LCD at intervals of 3 seconds.



o To playback the first 10 seconds ofeach track in the selected folder,press the button within one second.If it pressed for more than one sec-ond, it will playback the first secondsof each track in the all folder withbeep sound. Press the button againwithin one second when reached thedesired track, the searching functionis released and the track you desiredwill be played in the selected folder.(MP3 CD only)

11. FILE SEARCH Knob (TUNESelect Knob)

o You can skip the track by turning theFILE SEARCH knob to counterclock-wise or clockwise.

After selecting the desired track, pressthe FILE SEARCH knob to playbackthe track. If you do not press the FILESEARCH knob within 5 seconds, thefile searching function will be released.


9. CD EJECT Button

When the ( )button is pressed with aCD loaded, the CD will eject. Forcing toeject : To force to eject a CD, press thisbutton for more than 3 seconds. (Dothis only when a CD is jammed and youcan not eject it in the normal way - e.g.)in case that you have inserted 2 CDs bymistake)

10. SCAN

o To playback the first 10 seconds ofeach track, press the button with thebeep sound for more than one sec-ond. Press the button again whenreached the desired track.

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM150


151

!



After moving the desired folder, pressthe FILE SEARCH knob to playbackthe first file in the selected folder.If you do not press the FILE SEARCHknob within 5 seconds, the folder search-ing function will be released.It is not operated in single folder.




o The bookmarks are all erased whenthe car battery is disconnected orpower off. Therefore, all data willhave to be set again if this shouldoccur.





o Driving on the off-roads or othervibrations may skip your compactdisc. Do not use the audio systemon off-roads as the discs could bescratched and damaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the discwith your hand while the disc isbeing pulled into the unit by theself loading mechanism. Thesecan cause disc scratching to oc-cur or trouble in the compact discplayer.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the player could notbe operated in recording way ofthe CD maker. When using thecompact disc player, genuine CDsare recommended.

CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor qual-





TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM151


152

M465A01TG-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M465)(If Installed)


2. BAND Selector3. TUNE Select Knob4. Adjustment Mode Select

(A.MODE) Button5. SEEK Select Button6. Best Station Memory (BSM)

Button7. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button8. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

M465A01TG

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM152


153

M465B01TG-GAT


The radio unit may be operated whenthe ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON"position. Press the knob to switch thepower on. The LCD shows the radiofrequency in the radio mode, the tapedirection indicator in the tape mode orCD track in either the CD mode or CDAUTO CHANGER mode. To switch thepower off, press the knob again.

VOLUME Control


2. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes theAM(MW, LW), FM1 and FM2 bands.The mode selected is shown on thedisplay.

3. TUNE Select Knob


4. Adjustment modeselect(A.MODE) Button

Pressing the A. MODE button changesthe BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADERand BALANCE mode. The mode se-lected is shown on the display.

After selecting the each mode, rotatethe VOLUME control knob clockwise orcounterclockwise.

BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the BASS,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

MIDDLE Control


TREBLE Control


FADER Control

Rotate the control knob clockwise toemphasize rear speaker sound (frontspeaker sound will be attenuated).When the control knob is turned coun-terclockwise, front speaker sound willbe emphasized (rear speaker sound willbe attenuated).

BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to empha-size right speaker sound (left speakersound will be attenuated). When thecontrol knob is turned counterclock-wise, left speaker sound will be empha-sized (right speaker sound will be at-tenuated).

5. SEEK Select Button (Auto-matic Channel Selection)



TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM153


154


When the BSM button is pressed, thesix channels from the highest electricfield intensity are selected next andstored in memory. The stations se-lected are stored in the sequence fre-quency from the first preset key.

7. EQ Button



Six AM(MW, LW) and twelve FM sta-tions may be programmed into thememory of the radio. Then, by simplypressing the AM(MW, LW) / FM selectbutton and/or one of the six stationselect buttons, you may recall any ofthese stations instantly. To programthe stations, follow these steps:o Press AM(MW, LW)/FM selector to

set the band for AM(MW, LW), FM1and FM2.

o Select the desired station to be storedby seek or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station selectbutton you wish to use to access thatstation.

o Press the station select button formore than two seconds. A selectbutton indicator will show in the dis-play indicating which select buttonyou have depressed. The frequencydisplay will flash after it has beenstored into the memory. You shouldthen release the button, and proceedto program the next desired station.A total of 24 stations can be pro-grammed by selecting one AM(MW,

LW) and two FM station per button.o When completed, any preset station

may be recalled by selecting AM(MW,LW), FM1 or FM2 band and theappropriate station button.


Six (6) stations for AM(MW, LW), FM1and FM2 respectively can be preset inthe electronic memory circuit.

!CAUTION

o Do not place beverages close tothe audio system. The audio sys-tem mechanism may be damagedif you spill them.

o Do not strike or allow anything toimpact the audio system, damageto the system mechanisms couldoccur.


TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:06 PM154


155

M465C01TG-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (M465) (If Installed)

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button2. TAPE EJECT Button3. AUTO MUSIC Search Button4. DOLBY Button5. FF/REW Button6. REPEAT Button7. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button

M465C01TG

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:07 PM155


156

M465D01TG-GAT

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button

o This allows you to play the reverseside of the tape by merely pressingthe program button. The PLAY andan arrow will appear in the display toshow tape direction.

o Push the TAPE button to turn on thatfunction without pushing Power ON/OFF control knob.

2. TAPE EJECT Button

o When the EJECT button is pressedwith a cassette loaded, the cassettewill eject.

o When the EJECT button is pressedduring FF/REW mode, the cassettewill eject.

3. AUTO MUSIC Search Button

Press the button to find the startingpoint of each song in a prerecordedmusic tape. The quiet space betweensongs (must have at least a 4 sec. gap)can be identified by the AUTO MUSICsearch button.o Pressing the ( ) will play the be-

ginning of the next music segment.

o Pressing the ( ) will start replayat the beginning of the music justlistened to.

o To stop FF or REW action, press thebutton again.

4. DOLBY Button

If you get background noise during tapePLAY, you can reduce this consider-ably by merely pressing the DOLBYbutton. If you want to cancel the DOLBYfeature ( ), press the button again.

5. FF/REW Button

o Fast forward tape winding startswhen the FF button is pressed duringPLAY or REW mode.

o Tape PLAY starts when the FF but-ton is pressed again during FF mode.

o Tape rewinding starts when the REWbutton is pressed during PLAY or FFmode.

o Tape PLAY starts when the REWbutton pressed again during REWmode.

6. REPEAT Button

o To repeat the track you are currentlylistening to, press the RPT button.To cancel, press again.

o If you do not release RPT operationwhen the track ends, it will automati-cally be replayed.

This process will be continued until youpush the button again.

7. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-SIC, POPS, JAZZ, ROCK and DE-FEAT MODE for the desired tone qual-ity. Each press of the button changesthe display as follows;


TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:07 PM156


157

CAUTIONo Do not insert anything like coins

into the player slot as damage tothe unit may occur.



!

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:07 PM157


158

M465E01TG-GAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M465) (If Installed)- Compatiable with MP3/WMA

1. LOAD Button2. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button3. CD EJECT Button4. TRACK UP/DOWN5. SCROLL6. FF/REW Button7. EQUALIZER (EQ) Button8. SCAN9. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button10.REPEAT (RPT) Button11.RANDOM (RDM) Button12.DISC UP/DOWN Button13.FILE SEARCH Knob14.CHANGE DIRECTORY (DIR)

Button

M465E01TG

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:07 PM158


159

M465F01TG-GAT

1. LOAD Button

This compact disc player will accom-modate up to six compact discs.To insert one disc into the player, do thefollowing:1. Press and release the LOAD Button.2. Green light on the slot will be illumi-

nated and the lowest number of emptyslot will blink on the display. After"WAIT" is displayed on the LCD, theslot will open with "LOAD" displayedon the LCD.

3. Insert a disc partway into the slot,label side up. The player will pull thedisc in. When the disc is inserted,the disc will begin to play automati-cally.

NOTE:o The disc can be only inserted while

the green light is blinking on theslot.

o This CD player is suitable only for12 cm discs, do not use irregularshaped CDs.

To insert multiple discs into the player,do the followings:1. Press and hold the LOAD button for

one second or more. You will thenhear a beep sound and the green lighton the slot will be illuminated, and thenumbers of empty disc will blink onthe display.

2. After "WAIT" is displayed on theLCD with the lowest number of emptyslot blinking, the slot will open with"LOAD" displayed on the LCD.

3. Insert a disc partway into the slot,label side up. The player will pull thedisc in. Once the disc is loaded, thenumbers of the empty disc will blinkon the display continuously. If thenext "DISC NO." is displayed whenthe slot is illuminated, you can thenload another disc.

4. Load the remaining disc by followingthe same procedures 1 and 2. Whenyou finished loading 6 discs, the CDplayer will begin to play the last CDloaded.

5. To load more than one disc but lessthan six, complete Steps 1 and 2.When you have finished loadingdiscs, press LOAD button to cancelthe loading function or wait for 10seconds. The CD player will begin toplay the last CD loaded. As each CDstarts to play, the DISC number willappear on the display.

NOTE:The disc player takes up to six discs.Do not try to load more than six.

2. Audio/MP3 CD Select Button

o Press the CD Button to start CDplayback, during radio operation orcassette tape playing.

o When discs are in the CD deck, if youpress the CD button, the CD playerwill begin playing even if the radio orcassette player is being used.


TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:07 PM159


160

3. CD EJECT Button

o When the EJECT button is pressedwith a CD loaded, the CD will eject.

o To eject all of the discs, press thisbutton for one second or more.

4. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc cur-rently being played can be selectedusing the track number.

o Press ( ) once to skip forward to thebeginning of the next track.

o Press ( ) once to skip back to thebeginning of the track.

5. SCROLL

Press the button and you can check thefile title more than 16 characters onMP3 CD. The button doesn't work onfile title less than 16 characters.

6. FF/REW Button

While the disc is playing, if you holddown the FF button continuously, theselected track is advanced. Holdingdown the REW button continuouslymoves the selected track back.


Press the EQ button to select the CLAS-SIC, POPS, JAZZ, ROCK and DE-FEAT MODE for the desired tone qual-ity. Each press of the button changesthe display as follows;


When the CD player unit is operating,the desired track on the disc can bebookmarked by using the MARK but-ton.o Press the MARK button for more

than one second to bookmark thedesired track. "M" will be displayedon the LCD and "MEMORY NO." willdisplay for approximately five sec-onds with beep sound. To play thebookmarked tracks, press the MARKbutton within one second and selectthe book-marked track to play.

o To erase a bookmarked track, pressthe MARK button for more than onesecond. This will erase the book-mark with beep sound.

If you want to delete all tracks stored onMark Memory, press CD button in theMark Play mode for more than onesecond. You will hear a beep sound andall tracks will be deleted from MarkMemory with "MARK DELETE ALL"displayed on the LCD.

8. SCAN

o Press the SCAN button to playbackthe first 10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within10 sec. when you have reached thedesired track.

o To playback the first 10 seconds ofeach track in the selected folder,Press the SCAN button within a sec-ond. (MP3 CD only)

o To playback the first 10 seconds ofeach file in the selected DISC (MP3CD only), when press SCAN buttonfor one second or more.


TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:07 PM160


161

NOTE:Tracks stored on Mark Memory willbe automatically erased after youeject CDs that contain those tracks.


o To repeat the track you are currentlylistening to, press the RPT button.To cancel, press it again. If it pressedfor more than one second at thistime, it will be repeated all tracks.





o For listen to the music within thecurrently played folder in randomorder, press the RDM Button withinone second. To cancel, press it againwithin one second. If it pressed formore than one second, it will beplayed all in random order withincurrently played CD (MP3 CD only).

12. DISC UP/DOWN Button

o By pressing "DISC "/"DISC "while CD changer is playing, you canmove to the previews/next disc andplayback automatically begins.

o If any of the slots does not contain aCD, your car audio will skip emptyslot and plays only slot that containsa CD. When switching CD’s, theLCD displays the selected CD’s num-ber.

13. FILE SEARCH Knob(TUNESELECT Knob)

o You can move through the track byturning the FILE SEARCH knob clock-wise or counterclockwise.

o After moving the desired file, pressthe FILE SEARCH knob to playbackin the selected file.

o If you do not press the FILE SEARCHknob within five seconds, the filesearching function will be released.



o After moving the desired folder, pressthe FILE SEARCH knob to play backin the the selected folder. If you donot press the FILE SEARCH knobwithin 5 seconds, the folder search-ing function will be released. It is notoperated in a single folder.

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:07 PM161


162




o All stored bookmarks are all erasedwhen the car battery is discon-nected or power to the vehicle islost. If this occurs, the bookmarkswill have to be reset.

o Do not add any oil to the rotatingparts. Keep magnets, screwdriv-ers and other metallic objects awayfrom the tape mechanism and head.

o Do not attempt to grab or pull thecompact disc out while the disc isbeing pulled into the audio unit bythe self-loading mechanism. Dam-age to the audio unit and compactdisc could occur.




o Do not expose this equipment (in-cluding the speakers and tape) towater or excessive oisture.

o Avoid using recorded compactdiscs in your audio unit. Originalcompact discs are recommended.

o The unit is not sure of playing CD-RW (Rewritable).

CAUTIONo Do not insert warped or poor qual-





o Off-road or rough surface drivingmay cause the compact disc toskip. Do not use the compact discwhen driving in such conditionsas damage to the compact discface could occur.

!

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:07 PM162


163CARE OF DISCS

Storage

When not in use, place your discs intheir individual cases and store them ina cool place away from the sun, heat,and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.

B850A02F-AAT

Proper Handling

Handle your disc as shown. Do not dropthe disc. Hold the disc so you will notleave fingerprints on the surface. If thesurface is scratched, it may cause thepickup to skip signal tracks. Do notaffix tape, paper, or gummed labels onthe disc. Do not write on the disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged,warped or cracked discs. These couldseverely damage the playback mecha-nism.

B850A01LB850A02L

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surfaceof a disc could cause the pickup to skipsignal tracks. Wipe the surface cleanwith a clean soft cloth.If the surface is heavily soiled, dampena clean soft cloth in a solution of mildneutral detergent to wipe it clean.

Keep Your Discs Clean

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:07 PM163


164

B860A01TG

o Be sure that the cassette label is notloose or peeling off or tape ejectionmay be difficult.

o Never touch or soil the actual audiotape surfaces.

o Keep all magnetized objects, suchas electric motors, speakers or trans-formers away from your cassettetapes and tape player unit.

o Store cassettes in a cool, dry placewith the open side facing down toprevent dust from setting in the cas-sette body.

o Never leave a cassette inserted inthe player when not being played.This could damage the tape playerunit and the cassette tape.

o We strongly recommend against theuse of tapes longer than C-60 (60minutes total). Tapes such as C-120or C-180 are very thin and do notperform as well in the automotiveenvironment.

CARE OF CASSETTE TAPES

B860A01A-AAT

Proper care of your cassette tapes willextend the tape life and increase yourlistening enjoyment. Always protectyour tapes and cassette cases fromdirect sunlight and severely cold anddusty conditions. When not in use,cassettes should always be stored inthe original protective cassette case.When the vehicle is very hot or cold,allow the interior temperature to be-come more comfortable before listen-ing to your cassettes.

B860A01L

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:07 PM164


165

B860A03L

NOTE:Look at a tape before you insert it.If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning one of the hubs with a pencilor your finger.If the label is peeling off, do not putit in the drive mechanism.Do not leave tapes sitting wherethey are exposed to heat or highhumidity, such as on top of thedashboard or in the player.If a tape is exposed to excessivelyhot or cold, let it reach a moderatetemperature before putting it in theplayer.

o The playback head, capstan andpinch rollers will develop a coating oftape residue that can result in dete-rioration of sound quality, such as awavering sound. They should becleaned monthly using a commer-cially available head cleaning tape orspecial solution available from audiospecialty shops. Follow the supplier'sdirections carefully and never oil anypart of the tape player unit.

o Always be sure that the tape is tightlywound on its reel before inserting inthe player. Rotate a pencil in thedrive sprockets to wind up any slack.Head

Cotton applicatorB860A02L

o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage toreplay one given tune or tape sec-tion. This can cause poor tape wind-ing to occur, and eventually causeexcessive internal drag and pooraudio quality in the cassette. If thisoccurs, it can sometimes be cor-rected by fast winding the tape fromend to end several times. If this doesnot correct the problem, do not con-tinue to use the tape in your vehicle.

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:07 PM165


166 ANTENNA

B870D01Y-GAT

Glass Antenna

When the radio power switch is turnedon while the ignition key is in either the"ON" or "ACC" position, your car willreceive both AM and FM broadcastsignals through the antenna in the rearwindow glass.

HTG2189

CAUTION:o Do not clean the inner side of the

rear window glass with an abra-sive type of glass cleaner or usea scraper to remove foreign de-posits from the inner surface ofthe glass as this may cause dam-age to the antenna elements.

o Avoid adding metallic coatingsuch as Ni, Cd, and so on. Thesecan disturb receiving AM and FMbroadcast signals.

!

TGgene-1b.P65 6/16/2005, 3:07 PM166

2

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................ 2-2Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3Key Positions................................................................ 2-4Starting ......................................................................... 2-5Automatic Transaxle ..................................................... 2-5Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................................2-10Electronic Stability Program (ESP)..............................2-11Back Warning System .................................................2-12Good Braking Practices ..............................................2-13Driving for Economy ....................................................2-14Smooth Cornering ........................................................2-16Winter Driving ..............................................................2-16Trailer or Vehicle Towing .............................................2-19

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM1

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

C010A01A-AAT

WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle,open the windows immediately.

o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and deathby asphyxiation.

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose.If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath sideof the car, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.

o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run theengine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only inan open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawninto the interior.

If you must drive with the trunk open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher

speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front ofthe windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or any other obstructions.

!

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM2


3BEFORE STARTINGTHE ENGINE

C020A01A-AAT

Before you start the engine, you shouldalways:

1. Look around the vehicle to be surethere are no flat tires, puddles of oil,water or other indications of pos-sible trouble.

2. After entering the car, check to besure the parking brake is engaged.

3. Check that all windows and lightsare clean.

4. Check that the interior and exteriormirrors are clean and in position.

5. Check your seat, seatback andheadrest to be sure they are in theirproper positions.

6. Lock all the doors.7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure

that all other occupants have fas-tened theirs.

8. Turn off all lights and accessoriesthat are not needed.

C030A01TG-GAT

COMBINATION IGNITIONSWITCH

o Place the shift lever in "P" (park) anddepress the brake pedal fully.

o To start the engine, insert the ignitionkey and turn it to the "START" posi-tion. Release it as soon as the en-gine starts. Do not hold the key in the"START" position for more than 15seconds.

NOTE:For safety, the engine will not startif the shift lever is not in "P" or "N"position.

9. When you turn the ignition switch to"ON", check that all appropriatewarning lights are operating andthat you have sufficient fuel.

10.Check the operation of warninglights and all bulbs when key is inthe "ON" position.

TO START THE ENGINE

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM3


4

!

KEY POSITIONS

C070C01A-AAT

To remove the ignition key

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC"position.

2. Simultaneously push and turn theignition key counterclockwise fromthe "ACC" position to the "LOCK"position.

3. The key can be removed in the"LOCK" position.

NOTE:Do not hold the key in the "START"position for more than 15 seconds.

o "ON"

When the key is in the "ON position,the ignition is on and all accessoriesmay be turned on. If the engine is notrunning, the key should not be left inthe "ON" position. This will dischargethe battery and may also damage theignition system.

o "ACC"

With the key in the "ACC" position, thesome electrical accessories (radio etc.)may be operated.

o "LOCK"

The key can be removed or inserted inthis position.To protect against theft, the steeringwheel locks by removing the key.

C040A01A-AAT

WARNING:The engine should not be turnedoff nor the key removed from theignition key cylinder while the ve-hicle is in motion. The steeringwheel is locked by removing thekey.

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. Itwill crank until you release the key.

NOTE:To unlock the steering wheel, in-sert the key, and then turn the steer-ing wheel and key simultaneously.

LOCK

ACC

ON

STARTC070C01E

C040A01E

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM4


5

!

STARTING

C050A01A-AAT

WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed orpoorly ventilated area any longerthan is needed to move your car inor out of the area. The carbon mon-oxide gas emitted is odorless andcan cause serious injury or death.

C050B01TG-GAT

Normal Conditions:

The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.2. Depress the brake pedal fully and

place the selector lever in "P" (park)position.

3. After turning the ignition key to the"ON" position, make certain all warn-ing lights and gauges are function-ing properly before starting the en-gine.

4. Turn the ignition key to the "START"position and release it when the en-gine starts.

C050A01E

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

C090A01TG-GAT

The highly efficient Hyundai automatictransaxle has five forward speeds andone reverse speed. The individualspeeds are selected automatically,depending on the position of the speedselector lever. The selector lever has 2gates; the main gate and the manualgate.

NOTE:For information on manual gateoperation, refer to "Sports Mode".

In the main gate, the selector lever has4 positions.

G110D01TG

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM5


6

NOTE:Depress the brake pedal whenshifting.The selector lever can be shiftedfreely.

The first few shifts on a new ve-hicle, or if the battery has beendisconnected, may be somewhatabrupt. This is a normal condition,and the shifting sequence will ad-just after shifts are cycled a fewtimes by the T.C.M (Transaxle Con-trol Module).

CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" positionwhile the vehicle is moving.

!

The indicator lights in the instrumentcluster indicate the selector lever posi-tion when the ignition is switched "ON".During sports mode operation, the gearcurrently in use displays in the numeralindicator.

C090A02NF

C090B02A-AAT

The function of each position isas follows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place whenparked or while starting the engine.Whenever parking the car, apply theparking brake and shift the selectorlever to the "P" (Park) position.

CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the"P" (Park) position unless the ve-hicle is fully stopped. Failure toobserve this caution will cause se-vere damage to the transaxle.

!

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM6


7

SKIP : By rapidly moving the selectorforward or backward twice, it is pos-sible to skip one gear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or3rd to 1st .

CAUTION:o In sports mode, the driver must

execute upward shifts in accor-dance with prevailing road con-ditions, taking care to keep theengine speed below the red zone.

o For engine protection, upwardshifts are made automaticallywhen the engine rpm reaches thered zone.

o By rapidly moving the selectorlever backwards (-) twice it ispossible to skip one gear, i.e.,3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd or 5th to 3rd.Since sudden engine brakingand/or rapid acceleration cancause a loss of traction, how-ever, downshifts must be madecarefully in accordance with thevehicle's speed.

!

C090F01TG-GAT

Sports Mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or inmotion, sports mode is selected bypushing the selector lever from the "D"position into the manual gate. To re-turn to "D" range operation, push theselector lever back into the main gate.In sports mode, moving the selectorlever backwards and forwards canmake rapid gearshifts simple. In con-trast to a manual transaxle, the sportsmode allows gearshifts with the accel-erator pedal depressed.UP (+) : Push the lever forward once toshift up one gear.DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwardsonce to shift down one gear.

C090F01TG

C090D02A-AAT

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position, the transaxle is inneutral, which means that no gearsare engaged. The engine can be startedwith the shift lever in "N" position,although this is not recommended ex-cept if the engine stalls while the car ismoving.

C090E01TG-GAT

o D (Drive):

Use for normal driving. The transaxlewill automatically shift through a fivegear sequence.

C090C01A-AAT

o R (Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bringthe car to a complete stop before shift-ing the selector lever to "R" position.

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM7


8

NOTE:o In sports mode, only the five for-

ward gears can be selected. Toreverse or park the vehicle, movethe selector lever to the "R" or "P"position as required.

o In sports mode, downward shiftsare made automatically when thevehicle slows down. When thevehicle stops, 1st gear is auto-matically selected.

o To maintain the required levelsof vehicle performance andsafety, the system may not ex-ecute certain gearshifts when theselector lever is operated.

o Before driving away from a stopon a slippery road, push the se-lector lever forward into the +(UP)position. This causes thetransaxle to shift into 2nd gearwhich is better for smooth driv-ing away on a slippery road. Pushthe selector lever to the -(DOWN)side to shift back to 1st gear.

C090H01L-GAT

NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation,

depress the brake pedal whenshifting from "Neutral" positionor "Park" position to a forward orreverse gear.

o The ignition key must be in the"ON" position and the brake pedalfully depressed in order to movethe shift lever from the "P" (Park)position to any of the other posi-tions.

o It is always possible to shift from"R", "N", or "D" position to "P"position. The vehicle must befully stopped to avoid transaxledamage.

C090I03L-GAT

CAUTION:o Shift into "R" and "P" position

only when the vehicle has com-pletely stopped.

o Do not accelerate the engine inreverse or any of the forwardpositions with the brakes applied.

o Always apply the footbrake whenshifting from "P" or "N", to "R" or"D"position.

o Do not use the "P" (Park) posi-tion in place of the parking brake.Always set the parking brake,shift the transaxle into "P" (Park)position and turn off the ignitionwhen you leave the vehicle, evenmomentarily. Never leave the ve-hicle unattended while the en-gine is running.

o When accelerating from a stopon a steep hill, the vehicle mayhave a tendency to roll back-wards. Shifting the shift lever into2nd gear while in Sport mode willhelp prevent the vehicle fromrolling backwards.

!

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM8


9

o Do not "ride" the brakes. This cancause them to overheat and mal-function. Instead, when you are driv-ing down a long hill, slow down andshift to a lower gear. When you dothis, engine braking will help slowthe car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. Otherwise, the lower gear maynot be engaged.

o Always use the parking brake. Donot depend on placing the transaxlein "P" to keep the car from moving.

o Exercise extreme caution when driv-ing on a slippery surface. Be espe-cially careful when braking, acceler-ating or shifting gears. On a slipperysurface, an abrupt change in ve-hicle speed can cause the drivewheels to lose traction and the ve-hicle to go out of control.

C090N03O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never move the gear selector leverfrom "P" or "N" to any other positionwith the accelerator pedal de-pressed.

o Never move the gear selector leverinto "P" when the vehicle is in mo-tion.

o Be sure the car is completely stoppedbefore you attempt to shift into "R".

o Never take the car out of gear andcoast down a hill. This may be ex-tremely hazardous. Always leavethe car in gear when moving.

C090J01NF-GAT

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE(If Installed)

If you cannot move the shift lever fromthe "P" (Park) position to any otherposition with the brake pedal fully de-pressed and the ignition key in the"ON" position, remove the cap on theconsole and with a thin object such asa flat-head screwdriver, push the shift

C090J01TG

lock release button down. Then, withthe brake pedal depressed, move theshift lever to the desired position, andthen the shift lock release button willautomatically return to its original posi-tion after shifting from the "P" (Park)position. Then, reinstall the cap.If you need to use the shift lock re-lease, it could mean your car is devel-oping a problem. Have the car checkedby your Hyundai dealer.

o Check the automatic transaxle fluidlevel regularly, and add fluid asnecessary.

o See the maintenance schedulefor the proper fluid recommen-dation.

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM9


10

! !

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS)

C120A01FC-GAT

(If Installed)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) isdesigned to prevent wheel lock-upduring sudden braking or on hazard-ous road surfaces. The ABS controlmodule monitors the wheel speed andcontrols the pressure applied to eachbrake. Thus, in emergency situationsor on slick roads, ABS will increasevehicle control during braking.

NOTE:o A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the ve-hicle begins to move after the en-gine is started. These conditionsare normal and indicate that theanti-lock brake system (ElectronicStability Program) is functioningproperly.

o During ABS (ESP) operation, aslight pulsation may be felt in thebrake pedal when the brakes areapplied. Also, a noise may be heardin the engine compartment whilebraking. These conditions are nor-mal and indicate that the anti-lockbrake system (Electronic StabilityProgram System) is functioningproperly.

WARNING:ABS (ESP) will not prevent accidentsdue to improper or dangerous driv-ing maneuvers. Even though vehiclecontrol is improved during emer-gency braking, always maintain asafe distance between you and ob-jects ahead. Vehicle speeds shouldalways be reduced during extremeroad conditions.The braking distance for carsequipped with an anti-lock brakingsystem (Electronic Stability ProgramSystem) may be longer than for thosewithout it in the following road con-ditions. During these conditions thevehicle should be driven at reducedspeeds.

o Rough, gravel or snow-coveredroads.

o With tire chains installed.o On roads where the road surface

is pitted or has different surfaceheight.

The safety features of an ABS (ESP)equipped vehicle should not be testedby high speed driving or cornering.This could endanger the safety ofyourself or others.

WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel

movements, such as sharp lanechanges or fast, sharp turns.

o Always wear your seat belts.In a collision, an unbelted personis significantly more likely to diethan a person wearing a seat belt.

o The risk of rollover is greatly in-creased if you lose control ofyour vehicle at highway speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs iftwo or more wheels drop off theroadway and the driver oversteersto reenter the roadway.

o In the event your vehicle leavesthe roadway, do not steer sharply.Instead, slow down before pullingback into the travel lanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.o Excessive depressing of the ac-

celerator pedal in slippery driv-ing conditions such as pullingout of deep snow or mud maycause severe damage to thetransaxle. Rocking the vehicle isnot recommended. Rather, usean appropriate towing method.

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM10


11

!

CAUTION:Driving with varying tire or wheelsize may cause the ESP system tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are the same size asyour original tires.

WARNING:Electronic stability program is onlya driving aid; all normal precau-tions for driving in inclementweather and on slippery road sur-faces should be observed.

!

ELECTRONIC STABILITYPROGRAM (ESP)

C310A01JM-AAT

(If Installed)ESP checks where you are steeringand where the vehicle is actually go-ing. ESP applies the brakes at indi-vidual wheels and intervenes in theengine management system to stabi-lize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)system is an electronic system de-signed to help the driver maintain ve-hicle control under adverse conditions.It is not a substitute for safe drivingpractices. Factors including speed,road conditions and driver steeringinput can all affect whether ESP will beeffective in preventing a loss of con-trol. It is still your responsibility to driveand corner at reasonable speeds andto leave a sufficient margin of safety.

B310A01TG-1

C310B01JM-AAT

ESP ON/OFF Mode

When the ESP is operating, the ESPindicator in the instrument cluster willblink.If you turn the system off by pressingthe ESP switch, the ESP-OFF indica-tor will come on and stay on. In theESP-OFF mode, the stability controlwill be deactivated. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. To turn the system backon, press the switch again. The ESP-OFF indicator should go off.

NOTE:The ESP mode will automaticallybe turned ON after the engine isturned off and restarted.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)system is designed to stabilize thevehicle during cornering maneuvers.

B310A01TG-R



TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM11


12

C310D01JM-AAT

Indicators and Warning

The indicators should illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to ON orSTART but should go out after threeseconds.If the indicators do not illuminate, orthe ESP or ESP-OFF indicator doesnot go out after 3 seconds, have thevehicle checked by an authorizeddealer.

Should there be any unusual condi-tions in the device while driving, ESP-OFF indicator illuminates as a warn-ing.If ESP-OFF indicator illuminates, pullyour car to a safe place and stop theengine.Then, start the engine again to checkif the ESP-OFF indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even afterthe engine has been started, haveyour car checked by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

BACK WARNING SYSTEM

C400A01P-GAT

(If Installed)

The back warning system assists thedriver during backward movement ofthe vehicle by chiming if any object issensed within the distance of 1200mm (47 in.) behind the vehicle. Thissystem is only a supplemental system.

SensorHTG2187

NOTE:o Back warning system should only

be considered as a supplemen-tary function. The driver mustcheck the rearview.

o The audible warning signal canbe different depending on theobjects.

o The audible warning signal mightnot activate in case the sensor isfrozen or stained with dirt or mud.

o There is a chance of malfunctionof the back warning system whendriving in uneven surfaces suchas woods, gravel road, jaggedroad, or gradient.

o Do not push, or scratch the sur-face of the sensor. This will likelydamage the covering.

o The sensor system might not rec-ognize sharp objects, thick win-ter clothes or sponges whichabsorb the frequency.

o Clean dirty sensors with a softsponge and clean water.

o When more than two objects aresensed at the same time, the clos-est one will be recognized first.

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM12


13

!

GOOD BRAKINGPRACTICES

C130A01A-AAT

WARNING:Nothing should be carried on top ofthe shelf panel behind the rear seat.If there were an accident or a suddenstop, such objects could move for-ward and cause damage to the ve-hicle or injure the occupants.

o After being parked, check to be surethe parking brake is not engagedand that the parking brake indicatorlight is out before driving away.

o Driving through water may get thebrakes wet. They can also get wetwhen the car is washed. Wet brakesmay can be dangerous! Your carwill not stop as quickly if the brakesare wet. Wet brakes cause the carto pull to one side. To dry the brakes,apply the brakes lightly until thebraking action returns to normal,taking care to keep the car undercontrol at all times. If the brakingaction does not return to normal,stop as soon as it is safe to do soand call your Hyundai dealer forassistance.

o Such objects may not be detectedby the system at very close range(approximately 300 mm).

CAUTION:If you don't hear an audible warningsound or if the buzzer sounds inter-mittently when shifting the gear to"R" position, this indicate a malfunc-tion in the back warning system. Ifthis occurs, have your vehiclechecked your Hyundai dealer as soonas possible.

C400B01NF-GAT

Operation of the back warningsystem

Operating condition:

o This system will activate when back-ing up with the ignition key "ON".

o Sensing distance in backing up isapproximately 1200 mm (47 in.).

1st Warning

approx. 1200 mm

to 810 mm from

the rear bumper

Buzzer beeps

intermittently.

Sensing

Distance

Warning

Sound

2nd Warning

approx. 800 mm

to 410 mm from

the rear bumper

Buzzer sounds

beeps more

frequently.

3rd Warning

approx. 400 mm

Buzzer sounds

continuously.

!

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM13


14 DRIVING FOR ECONOMY

o Don't coast down hills with the carout of gear. This is extremely haz-ardous. Keep the car in gear at alltimes, use the brakes to slow down,then shift to a lower gear so thatengine braking will help you main-tain a safe speed.

o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Rest-ing your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving can be dangerous be-cause it can result in the brakesoverheating and losing their effec-tiveness.It also increases the wear of thebrake components.

o If a tire goes flat while you aredriving, apply the brakes gently andkeep the car pointed straight aheadwhile you slow down. When you aremoving slowly enough for it to besafe to do so, pull off the road andstop in a safe place.

o If your car is equipped with an auto-matic transaxle, don't let your carcreep forward. To avoid creepingforward, keep your foot on the brakepedal when the car is stopped.

o Use caution when parking on a hill.Engage the parking brake and placethe gear selector lever in "P" (auto-

matic transaxle) or in first or reversegear (manual transaxle). If your caris facing downhill, turn the frontwheels into the curb to help keep thecar from rolling. If your car is facinguphill, turn the front wheels awayfrom the curb to help keep the carfrom rolling. If there is no curb or if itis required by other conditions tokeep the car from rolling, block thewheels.

o Under some conditions your park-ing brake can freeze in the engagedposition. This is most likely to hap-pen when there is an accumulationof snow or ice around or near therear brakes or if the brakes are wet.If there is a risk that the parkingbrake may freeze, apply it only tem-porarily while you put the gear se-lector lever in "P" (automatic) or infirst or reverse gear (manualtransaxle) and block the rear wheelsso the car cannot roll. Then releasethe parking brake.

o Do not hold the vehicle on the up-grade with the accelerator pedal.This can cause the transaxle tooverheat. Always use the brakepedal or parking brake.

C140A01A-AAT

You can save fuel and get more milesfrom your car if you follow these sug-gestions:

o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at amoderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shiftsand maintain a steady cruisingspeed. Don't race between stop-lights. Try to adjust your speed tothat of the other traffic so you don'thave to change speeds unneces-sarily. Avoid heavy traffic wheneverpossible. Always maintain a safedistance from other vehicles so youcan avoid unnecessary braking. Thisalso reduces brake wear.

o Drive at a moderate speed. Thefaster you drive, the more fuel yourcar uses. Driving at a moderatespeed, especially on the highway, isone of the most effective ways toreduce fuel consumption.

o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal.This can increase fuel consumptionand also increase wear on thesecomponents. In addition, driving with

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM14


15

o Keep your car clean. For maximumservice, your Hyundai should bekept clean and free of corrosivematerials. It is especially importantthat mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be al-lowed to accumulate on the under-side of the car. This extra weightcan result in increased fuel con-sumption and also contribute to cor-rosion.

o Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-sary weight in your car. Weight re-duces fuel economy.

o Don't let the engine idle longer thannecessary. If you are waiting (andnot in traffic), turn off your engineand restart only when you're readyto go.

o Remember, your Hyundai does notrequire extended warm-up. As soonas the engine is running smoothly,you can drive away. In very coldweather, however, give your enginea slightly longer warm-up period.

your foot resting on the brake pedalmay cause the brakes to overheat,which reduces their effectivenessand may lead to more serious con-sequences.

o Take care of your tires. Keep theminflated to the recommended pres-sure. Incorrect inflation, either toomuch or too little, results in unnec-essary tire wear. Check the tire pres-sures at least once a month.

o Be sure that the wheels are alignedcorrectly. Improper alignment canresult from hitting curbs or drivingtoo fast over irregular surfaces. Pooralignment causes faster tire wearand may also result in other prob-lems as well as greater fuel con-sumption.

o Keep your car in good condition. Forbetter fuel economy and reducedmaintenance costs, maintain yourcar in accordance with the mainte-nance schedule in Section 5. If youdrive your car in severe conditions,more frequent maintenance is re-quired (see Section 5 for details).

o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.Lugging is driving too slowly in toohigh a gear resulting in the enginebucking. If this happens, shift to alower gear. Over-revving is racingthe engine beyond its safe limit.This can be avoided by shifting atthe recommended speeds.

o Use your air conditioning sparingly.The air conditioning system is oper-ated by engine power so your fueleconomy is reduced when you useit.

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM15


16 SMOOTH CORNERING

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-ners, especially when roads are wet.Ideally, corners should always be takenunder gentle acceleration. If you followthese suggestions, tire wear will beheld to a minimum.

WINTER DRIVING

C160A01A-AAT

The more severe weather conditionsof winter result in greater wear andother problems. To minimize the prob-lems of winter driving, you should fol-low these suggestions:

C160B01A-GAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, itmay be necessary to use snow tires orto install tire chains on your tires. Ifsnow tires are needed, it is necessaryto select tires equivalent in size andtype of the original equipment tires.Failure to do so may adversely affectthe safety and handling of your car.Furthermore, speeding, rapid accel-eration, sudden brake applications, andsharp turns are potentially very haz-ardous practices.During deceleration, use engine brak-ing to the fullest extent. Sudden brakeapplications on snowy or icy roadsmay cause skids to occur. You need tokeep sufficient distance between thevehicle in operation in front and your

vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently. Itshould be noted that installing tirechains on the tire will provide a greaterdriving force, but will not prevent sideskids.

NOTE:Tire chains are not legal in all prov-inces. Check province laws beforefitting tire chains.

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene Gly-col Coolant

Your Hyundai is delivered with highquality ethylene glycol coolant in thecooling system. It is the only type ofcoolant that should be used because ithelps prevent corrosion in the coolingsystem, lubricates the water pump andprevents freezing. Be sure to replaceor replenish your coolant in accor-dance with the maintenance schedulein Section 5. Before winter, have yourcoolant tested to assure that its freez-ing point is sufficient for the tempera-tures anticipated during the winter.

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM16


17

C160G01A-GAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirtan approved de-icer fluid or glycerineinto the key opening. If a lock is cov-ered with ice, squirt it with an approvedde-icing fluid to remove the ice. If thelock is frozen internally, you may beable to thaw it out by using a heatedkey. Handle the heated key with careto avoid burning your fingers.

NOTE:The proper temperature for usingthe immobilizer key is from -40°C (-40°F) to 80°C (176°F). If you heat theimmobilizer key over 80°C (176°F) toopen the frozen lock, it may causedamage to the transponder in itshead.

C160D01A-AAT

Check Battery and Cables

Winter puts additional burdens on thebattery system. Visually inspect thebattery and cables as described inSection 6. The level of charge in yourbattery can be checked by your Hyundaidealer or a service station.

C160F01A-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and IgnitionSystem

Inspect your spark plugs as describedin Section 6 and replace them if neces-sary. Also check all ignition wiring andcomponents to be sure they are notcracked, worn or damaged in any way.

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil ifNecessary

In some climates it is recommendedthat a lower viscosity "winter weight"oil be used during cold weather. SeeSection 9 for recommendations. If youaren't sure what weight oil you shoulduse, consult your Hyundai dealer.

C160H01A-AAT

Use Approved Anti-Freeze inWindow Washer System

To keep the water in the window washersystem from freezing, add an approvedanti-freeze solution in accordance withinstructions on the container. Windowwasher anti-freeze is available fromHyundai dealers and most auto partsoutlets. Do not use engine coolant orother types of anti-freeze as thesemay damage the finish.

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM17


18

C160I01A-AAT

Don't Let Your Parking BrakeFreeze

Under some conditions your parkingbrake can freeze in the engaged posi-tion. This is most likely to happenwhen there is an accumulation of snowor ice around or near the rear brakes orif the brakes are wet. If there is a riskthe parking brake may freeze, apply itonly temporarily while you put the gearselector lever in "P" (automatic) or infirst or reverse gear (manual transaxle)and block the rear wheels so the carcannot roll. Then release the parkingbrake.

C160J01A-AAT

Don't Let Ice and Snow Accumu-late Underneath

Under some conditions, snow and icecan build up under the fenders andinterfere with the steering. When driv-ing in severe winter conditions wherethis may happen, you should periodi-cally check underneath the car to besure the movement of the front wheelsand the steering components is notobstructed.

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipment

Depending on the severity of theweather where you drive your car, youshould carry appropriate emergencyequipment. Some of the items youmay want to carry include tire chains,tow straps or chains, flashlight, emer-gency flares, sand, a shovel, jumpercables, a window scraper, gloves,ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

HIGHER SPEED MOTORING

C170A01A-AAT

Pre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:Adjust the tire inflation pressures tospecification. Low tire inflation pres-sures will result in overheating andpossible failure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tireswhich may result in reduced traction ortire failure.

NOTE:Never exceed the maximum tire in-flation pressure shown on the tires.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuelthan urban motoring. Do not forget tocheck both engine coolant and engineoil.

3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt mayresult in overheating of the engine.

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM18


19USE OF LIGHTS TRAILER OR VEHICLETOWING

C190A01A-GAT

If you are considering towing with yourcar, you should first check with yourProvince Department of Motor Vehiclesto determine their legal requirements.Since laws vary from province to prov-ince the requirements for towing trail-ers, cars, or other types of vehicles orapparatus may differ. Ask your Hyundaidealer for further details before towing.

CAUTION:Do not do any towing with your carduring its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles)in order to allow the engine to prop-erly break in. Failure to heed thiscaution may result in serious en-gine or transaxle damage.

!

C180A01A-AAT

Check your lights regularly for correctoperation and always keep them clean.When driving during the day in condi-tions of poor visibility, it is helpful todrive with headlights on low beam.This enables you to be seen as well asto see.

C190B01S-AAT

Trailer Hitches

Select the proper hitch and ball combi-nation, making sure that it's location iscompatible with that of the trailer orvehicle being towed.Use a quality non-equalizing hitch whichdistributes the tongue load uniformlythroughout the chassis.

The hitch should be bolted securely tothe car and installed by a qualifiedtechnician. DO NOT USE A HITCHDESIGNED FOR TEMPORARY IN-STALLATION AND NEVER USE ONETHAT ATTACHES ONLY TO THEBUMPER.

C190C02Y-GAT

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a brakingsystem, make sure it conforms to fed-eral and/or local regulations and that itis properly installed and operating cor-rectly.

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM19


20

NOTE:If you tow a trailer or vehicle, yourcar will require more frequent main-tenance due to the additional load.See "Maintenance Under SevereUsage Conditions" on page 5-6.

CAUTION:o Never connect a trailer brake sys-

tem directly to the vehicle brakesystem.

o When towing a trailer on steepgrades (in excess of 12%) payclose attention to the engine cool-ant temperature gauge to ensurethe engine does not overheat. Ifthe needle of the coolant tem-perature gauge moves across thedial towards "H" (HOT), pull overand stop as soon as it is safe todo so, and allow the engine toidle until it cools down. You mayproceed once the engine hascooled sufficiently.

!

C190D01A-GAT

Safety Chains

Should the hitch connection betweenyour car and the trailer or vehicle youare towing fail, the trailer or vehiclecould wander dangerously across otherlanes of traffic and ultimately collidewith another vehicle. To eliminate thispotentially dangerous situation, safetychains, attached between your car andthe trailer or towed vehicle, are re-quired in most provinces.

C190E01TG-GAT

Trailer Weight Limit

Tongue load Total trailer weight

Tongue loads can be increased ordecreased by re-distributing the loadin the trailer.This can be verified by checking thetotal weight of the loaded trailer andthen checking the load on the tongue.

NOTE:1. Never load the trailer with more

weight in the back than in thefront. About 60% of the trailerload should be in the front halfon the trailer and the remaining40% in the rear.

C190E01JM

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM20


21

!

C190E02JM

Improper trailer loading and/or toomuch luggage in the trunk canoverload the rear axle. Redistrib-ute the load and check the axleweight again.

4. The maximum permissible staticvertical load on the coupling de-vice is 90 kg.

Gross Axle Weight Gross VehicleWeight

2. The total gross vehicle weight withtrailer must not exceed the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)shown on the vehicle identifica-tion plate (see page 8-2). The totalgross vehicle weight is the com-bined weight of the vehicle, driver,all passengers and their luggage,cargo, hitch, trailer tongue loadand other optional equipment.

3. The front or rear axle weight mustnot exceed the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) shown on thevehicle identification plate (seepage 8-2). It is possible that yourtowing package does not exceedthe GVWR but exceeds the GAWR.

C190E01TG

kg (lbs)

CAUTION:The following specifications are rec-ommended when towing a trailer.The loaded trailer weight cannotsafely exceed the values in the chartbelow.

!

WARNING:Improperly loading your car andtrailer can seriously affect its steer-ing and braking performance caus-ing a crash which could cause injuryor death.

Tongue

90 (198)

-

With Brake

Without Brake

Maximum Towable Weight

Trailer

1800 (3968)

750 (1653)

5. The maximum permissible over-hang of the coupling point is 1,255mm.

Couplingpoint

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM21


22

C190F01A-GAT

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips

1. Before towing, check hitch andsafety chain connections as well asproper operation of the trailer run-ning lights, brake lights, and turnsignals.

2. Always drive your vehicle at a mod-erate speed (Less than 100 km/h).

3. Trailer towing requires more fuelthan normal conditions.

4. To maintain engine braking effi-ciency and electrical charging per-formance, do not use fifth gear(manual transaxle) or overdrive (au-tomatic transaxle).

5. Always secure items in the trailer toprevent load shift while driving.

6. Check the condition and air pres-sure of all tires on the trailer andyour car. Low tire pressure can se-riously affect the handling. Alsocheck the spare tire.

7. The vehicle/trailer combination ismore affected by crosswind andbuffeting. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. If there istoo much wind buffeting, slow downto get out of the other vehicle's airturbulence.

8. When parking your car and trailer,especially on a hill, be sure to followall the normal precautions. Turn yourfront wheel into the curb, set theparking brake firmly, and put thetransaxle in 1st or Reverse (manual)or Park (automatic). In addition,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer's tires.

9. If the trailer has electric brakes,start your vehicle and trailer mov-ing, and then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be sure thebrakes are working. This lets youcheck your electrical connection atthe same time.

10.During your trip, check occasion-ally to be sure that the load issecure, and that the lights and anytrailer brakes are still working.

11.Avoid jerky starts, sudden accel-eration or sudden stops.

12.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lanechanges.

13.Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. This couldcause the brakes to overheat, re-sulting in reduced braking efficiency.

14.When going down a hill, shift into alower gear and use the engine brak-ing effect. When ascending a longgrade, downshift the transaxle to alower gear and reduce speed toreduce chances of engine over-loading and/or overheating.

15.If you have to stop while goinguphill, do not hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelera-tor. This can cause the automatictransaxle to overheat. Use the park-ing brake or foot brake.

NOTE:When towing, check transaxle fluidmore frequently.

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM22


23

CAUTION:If overheating should occur whentowing, (temperature gauge readsnear red zone), taking the followingaction may reduce or eliminate theproblem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.2. Reduce highway speed.3. Select a lower gear when going

uphill.4. While in stop and go traffic, place

the gear selector park or neutraland idle the engine at a higherspeed.

!

TGgene-2.P65 6/9/2005, 5:59 PM23

3

If the Engine Will not Start ............................................ 3-2Jump Starting ............................................................... 3-3If the Engine Overheats ............................................... 3-4Spare Tire .................................................................... 3-5If You Have a Flat Tire ................................................. 3-6Changing a Flat Tire .................................................... 3-6If Your Vehicle Must Be Towed ..................................3-10Emergency Towing .....................................................3-12If You Lose Your Keys................................................3-13

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3

TGgene-3.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM1

3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

2

!

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOTSTART

D010A01A-AAT D010B01TG-AAT

If Engine Doesn't Turn Over orTurns Over Slowly

1. Be sure the gear selector lever is in"N" or "P" and the emergency brakeis set.

2. Check the battery connections to besure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the lightdims or goes out when you operatethe starter, the battery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to besure they are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle tostart it. See instructions for "JumpStarting" on the following pages.

D010D01A-AAT

If Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keep-ing a straight line. Move cautiouslyoff the road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact aHyundai dealer or seek other quali-fied assistance.

D010C01Y-AAT

If Engine Turns Over Normallybut Does Not Start

1. Check fuel level.2. With the key in the "OFF" position,

check all connectors at ignition coilsand spark plugs. Re-connect anythat may be disconnected or loose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engineroom.

4. If engine still refuses to start, call aHyundai dealer or seek other quali-fied assistance.

WARNING:If the engine will not start, do notpush or pull the car to start it. Thiscould result in a collision or causeother damage. In addition, push orpull starting may cause the cata-lytic converter to be overloaded andcreate a fire hazard.

HTG5019

TGgene-3.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM2

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3

!

JUMP STARTING

D020A02A-AAT

WARNING:The gas produced by the batteryduring the jump-start operation ishighly explosive. If these instruc-tions are not followed exactly, seri-ous personal injury and damage tothe vehicle may occur! If you arenot sure how to follow this proce-dure, seek qualified assistance.Automobile batteries contain sul-furic acid. This is poisonous andhighly corrosive. When jump start-ing, wear protective glasses and becareful not to get acid on yourself,your clothing or on the car.

o If you should accidentally get acid onyour skin or in your eyes, immedi-ately remove any contaminated cloth-ing and flush the area with cleanwater for at least 15 minutes. Thenpromptly obtain medical attention. Ifyou must be transported to an emer-gency facility, continue to apply wa-ter to the affected area with a spongeor cloth.

o The gas produced by the batteryduring the jump-start operation ishighly explosive. Do not smoke orallow a spark or an open flame inthe vicinity.

o The battery being used to providethe jump start must be 12-volt. If youcannot determine that it is a 12-voltbattery, do not attempt to use it forthe jump start.

o To jump start a car with a dischargedbattery, follow this procedure ex-actly:

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, be sure the twovehicles are not touching.

2. Turn off all unnecessary lights andaccessories in both vehicles.

HTG4001

Boosterbattery

3. Attach the clamps of the jumpercable in the exact location shown inthe illustration. First, attach oneclamp of the jumper cable to thepositive (+) post or cable of thedischarged battery. Then attach theother end of the same cable to thepositive (+) post or cable of thebooster battery. Next, using theother cable, attach one clamp to thenegative (-) post or cable of thebooster battery. Then attach the otherend of that cable to a solid metal partof the engine away from the battery.Do not connect the cable to anymoving part.

4. Start the engine in the car with thebooster battery and let it run for afew minutes. This will help to as-sure that the booster battery is fullycharged. During the jumping opera-tion, run the engine in this vehicle atabout 2,000 rpm.

5. Start the engine in the car with thedischarged battery using the normalstarting procedure. After the enginestarts, leave the jumper cables con-nected and let the engine run at fastidle or about 2,000 rpm for severalminutes.

Dischargedbattery

TGgene-3.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM3


4

!

!

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

(If the air conditioning had been inuse, it is normal for cold water to bedraining from it when you stop).

D030A01TG-AAT

If your temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, you experience a loss ofpower, or hear loud pinging or knock-ing, the engine is probably too hot. Ifthis happens to you, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon asit is safe to do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in "P"and set the parking brake. If the airconditioning is on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out underthe car or steam is coming out fromthe hood, stop the engine. Do notopen the hood until the enginecoolant has stopped running or thesteaming has stopped. If there is novisible loss of coolant and no steam,leave the engine running and checkto be sure the engine cooling fan isoperating. If the fan is not running,turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drivebelt is missing. If it is not missing,check to see that it is tight. If thedrive belt seems to be satisfactory,check for engine coolant leaking fromthe radiator, hoses or under the car.

6. Carefully remove the jumper cablesin the reverse order of attachment.

If you do not know why your batterybecame discharged (because the lightswere left on, etc.), have the chargingsystem checked by your Hyundaidealer.

WARNING:While the engine is running, keephands and clothing away from mov-ing parts such as the fan and drivebelts to prevent injury.

5. If the water pump drive belt is brokenor coolant is leaking out, stop theengine immediately and call the near-est Hyundai dealer for assistance.

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap whenthe engine is hot. This can allowcoolant to be blown out of the open-ing and cause serious burns.

TGgene-3.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM4


5

6. If you cannot find the cause of theoverheating, wait until the enginetemperature has returned to nor-mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,carefully add coolant to the reservoir(Page 6-8) to bring the fluid level inthe reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alertfor further signs of overheating. Ifoverheating happens again, call aHyundai dealer for assistance.

! CAUTION:Serious loss of coolant indicatesthere is a leak in the cooling systemand this should be checked as soonas possible by a Hyundai dealer.

SPARE TIRE

D040B01TG-GAT

Handling the Spare Tire

1. Open the trunk lid.2. Remove the luggage mat.3. Take out the tool receptacle.

Spare Tire Pressure

D040A01TG-GAT

The following instructions for the FULLSIZE spare tire should be observed:

Check inflation pressure as soon aspractical after installing the spare tire,and adjust to the specified pressure.The tire pressure should be periodi-cally checked and maintained at thespecified pressure while the tire isstored.

Tire SizeInflation Pressure

Full Size210 kPa (30 psi)

HNF4008

4. Turn the installation bolt counter-clockwise to remove the spare tire.

5. After replacing the spare tire, installand tighten the bolt firmly with yourfingers until there is no more play inthe spare tire.

TGgene-3.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM5


6 CHANGING A FLAT TIREIF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

D060A01TG-AAT

The procedure described on the follow-ing pages can be used to rotate tires aswell as to change a flat tire. Whenpreparing to change a flat tire, check tobe sure the gear selector lever is in "P"and that the parking brake is set, then:

D050A01TG-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal and let the car slow downwhile driving straight ahead. Do notapply the brakes immediately or at-tempt to pull off the road as this maycause a loss of control. When thecar has slowed to such a speed thatit is safe to do so, brake carefullyand pull off the road. Drive off theroad as far as possible and park onfirm, level ground. If you are on adivided highway, do not park in themedian area between the two trafficlanes.

2. When the car is stopped, turn on youremergency hazard flashers, set theparking brake and put the transaxlein "P".

3. Have all passengers get out of thecar. Be sure they all get out on theside of the car that is away fromtraffic.

4. Change the tire according to theinstructions provided as follows.

D060A01TG

D060B01NF-AAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool

D060B01NF

Take out the tool receptacle and turnthe installation bolt counterclockwiseto obtain spare tire from the trunk.

TGgene-3.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM6


7

D060C01A-AAT

2. Block the Wheel

Block the wheel that is diagonally op-posite from the flat to keep the vehiclefrom rolling when the car is raised onthe jack.

HTG4009

Flat tire

D060E01A-AAT

4. Put the Jack in Place

The base of the jack should be placedon firm, level ground. The jack shouldbe positioned as shown in the drawing.

D060D01A-AAT

3. Loosen Wheel Nuts

The wheel nuts should be loosenedslightly before raising the car. To loosenthe nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-terclockwise. When doing this, be surethat the socket is seated completelyover the nut so it cannot slip off. Formaximum leverage, position thewrench so the handle is to the left asshown in the drawing. Then, whileholding the wrench near the end of thehandle, push down on it with steadypressure. Do not remove the nuts atthis time. Just loosen them about one-half turn.

HTG4011 D060E01TG

TGgene-3.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM7


8

!D060G02Y-AAT

6. Changing Wheels

Use the wrench to loosen the wheelnuts, then remove them with your fin-gers. Slide the wheel off the studs andlay it flat so it cannot roll away. To putthe wheel on the hub, pick up the sparetire, line up the holes with the studs andslide the wheel onto them. If this isdifficult, tip the wheel slightly and getthe top hole in the wheel lined up withthe top stud. Then jiggle the wheel backand forth until the wheel can be slid overthe other studs.

D060F02E-AAT

5. Raising the Car

After inserting a wrench bar into thewheel nut wrench, install the wrench barinto the jack as shown in the drawing.To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nutwrench clockwise. As the jack beginsto raise the vehicle, double check thatit is properly positioned and will not slip.If the jack is on soft ground or sand,place a board, brick, flat stone or otherobject under the base of the jack tokeep it from sinking.Raise the car high enough so that thefully inflated spare tire can be installed.To do this, you will need more groundclearance than is required to removethe flat tire.

WARNING:Do not get under the car when it issupported by the jack! This is verydangerous as the jack could falland cause serious injury or death.No one should stay in the car whilethe jack is being used.

D060F01TGWheel nut wrench

D060G01TG

Wrench bar

TGgene-3.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM8


9

! WARNING:Wheels may have sharp edges.Handle them carefully to avoid pos-sible severe injury. Before puttingthe wheel into place, be sure thatthere is nothing on the hub or wheel(such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) thatinterferes with the wheel from fittingsolidly against the hub. If there is,remove it. If there is not good contacton the mounting surface betweenthe wheel and hub, the wheel nutscould come loose and cause the lossof a wheel. Loss of a wheel mayresult in loss of control of the ve-hicle. This may cause serious injuryor death.

D060G02TG

Lower the car to the ground by turningthe wheel nut wrench counterclock-wise.

D060I01E-GAT

8. Lower Vehicle and TightenNuts

D060H02O-AAT

7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

To reinstall the wheel, hold it on thestuds, put the wheel nuts on the studsand tighten them finger tight. The nutsshould be installed with their smalldiameter ends directed inward. Jigglethe tire to be sure it is completelyseated, then tighten the nuts as muchas possible with your fingers again.

D060H01TG

D060I01TG

HTG4013

TGgene-3.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM9


10

Then position the wrench as shown inthe drawing and tighten the wheel nuts.Be sure the socket is seated com-pletely over the nut. Do not stand onthe wrench handle or use an extensionpipe over the wrench handle.Go around the wheel tightening everyother nut until they are all tight. Thendouble-check each nut for tightness.After changing wheels, have a techni-cian tighten the wheel nuts to theirproper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:900-1,100 kg.cm (65-80 lb.ft)

D060J01E-AAT

AFTER CHANGING WHEELS

If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure.If the pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the cor-rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust ituntil it is correct. Always reinstall thevalve cap after checking or adjustingtire pressure. If the cap is not replaced,air may leak from the tire. If you lose avalve cap, buy another and install it assoon as possible.After you have changed wheels, al-ways secure the flat tire in its place inthe trunk and return the jack and toolsto their proper storage locations.

HTG5016-1

IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BETOWED

D080A01O-GAT

If your vehicle has to be towed, it shouldbe done by your Hyundai dealer or acommercial tow truck service. This willhelp assure that your vehicle is notdamaged in towing. Also, professionalsare generally aware of local laws gov-erning towing. In any case, rather thanrisk damage to your car, it is suggestedthat you show this information to thetow truck operator. Be sure that a safetychain system is used and that all locallaws are observed.It is recommended that your vehiclebe towed with a wheel lift and dollies orflatbed equipment with all the wheelsoff the ground.

! CAUTION:o Your vehicle can be damaged if

towed incorrectly!o Be sure the transaxle is in neu-

tral.o When the engine will not start, be

sure the steering is unlocked byplacing the key in the "ACC" po-sition.

TGgene-3.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM10


11

D080B01TG-GAT

Towing the Vehicle

D080B01TG

Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lifttype truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment(3).

1)

2)

3) dolly

CAUTION:o When towing the vehicle, take

care not to cause damage to thebumper or underbody of the ve-hicle.

1) If the vehicle is being towed with therear wheels on the ground, be surethe parking brake is released.

NOTE:Before towing, check the level ofthe automatic transaxle fluid. If it isbelow the "HOT" range on the dip-stick, add fluid. If you cannot addfluid, a towing dolly must be used.

2) If any of the loaded wheels or sus-pension components are damagedor the vehicle is being towed withthe front wheels on the ground, usea towing dolly under the front wheels.

D080B02TG

!

o Do not tow with sling type truck asthis may cause damage to thebumper or underbody of the ve-hicle.

TGgene-3.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM11


12

D080D04A-GAT

Emergency Towing

For emergency towing when no com-mercial tow vehicle is available, attacha tow cable, chain or strap to one of thetowing hooks under the front/rear ofyour car.

D080D01TG

!

D080B03TG

CAUTION:

A vehicle with an automatic transaxleshould never be towed from the rearwith the front wheels on the ground.This can cause serious damage tothe transaxle. Be sure to use a towingdolly under the front wheels.

3) It is recommended that your vehiclebe towed with all the wheels off theground.

D080D02TG

Do not attempt to tow your vehicle inthis manner on any unpaved surface.This could result in serious damage toyour car.Nor should towing be attempted if thewheels, drive train, axles, steering orbrakes are damaged. Before towing,be sure the transaxle is in neutral andthe key is in "ACC" (with the engine off)or in the "ON" position (with the enginerunning). A driver must be in the towedcar to steer it and operate the brakes.

NOTE:Before towing, check the level ofthe automatic transaxle fluid. If it isbelow the "HOT" range on the dip-stick, add fluid. If you cannot addfluid, a towing dolly must be used.

(Front)

(Rear)

Towing hook

Towing hook

TGgene-3.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM12


13

CAUTION:If the car is being towed with all fourwheels on the ground, it can betowed only from the front. Be surethat the transaxle is in neutral. Donot tow at speeds greater than 50km/h (30 mph) and for more than 25km (15 miles). Be sure the steeringis unlocked by placing the key inthe "ACC" position. A driver mustbe in the towed vehicle to operatethe steering and brakes.

!

IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

D120A01A-GAT

If you lose your keys, many Hyundaidealers can make you a new key if youhave your key number. If you lock thekeys inside your car and you cannotobtain a new key, many Hyundai deal-ers can use special tools to open thedoor for you.Information about the key of immobi-lizer system (If Installed) will be foundon page 1-4.

TGgene-3.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM13

4

Corrosion Protection .................................................... 4-2To Help Prevent Corrosion........................................... 4-3Washing and Waxing ................................................... 4-4Cleaning the Interior ..................................................... 4-5

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

4

TGgene-4.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM1

44 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

2 CORROSION PROTECTION

E010A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai fromCorrosion

By using the most advanced designand construction practices to combatcorrosion, Hyundai produces cars ofthe highest quality, However, this isonly part of the job. To achieve thelong-term corrosion resistance yourHyundai can deliver, the owner's co-operation and assistance is also re-quired.

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car isregularly exposed to corrosive materi-als, corrosion protection is particularlyimportant. Some of the commoncauses of accelerated corrosion areroad salts, dust control chemicals,ocean air and industrial pollution.

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corro-sion on your car are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that isallowed to accumulate underneaththe car.

o Removal of paint or protective coat-ings by stones, gravel, abrasion orminor scrapes and dents which leaveunprotected metal exposed to cor-rosion.

E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions inwhich corrosion is most likely to occur.For example, corrosion is acceleratedby high humidity, particularly when tem-peratures are just above freezing. Insuch conditions, the corrosive mate-rial is kept in contact with the carsurfaces by moisture that is slow toevaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive becauseit is slow to dry and holds moisture incontact with the vehicle. Although themud appears to be dry, it can still retainthe moisture and promote corrosion.High temperatures can also acceler-ate corrosion of parts that are notproperly ventilated so the moisturecan be dispersed. For all these rea-sons, it is particularly important to keepyour car clean and free of mud oraccumulations of other materials. Thisapplies not only to the visible surfacesbut particularly to the underside of thecar.

TGgene-4.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM2

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

3


3TO HELP PREVENTCORROSION

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorlyventilated garage. This creates a fa-vorable environment for corrosion. Thisis particularly true if you wash your carin the garage or drive it into the garagewhen it is still wet or covered withsnow, ice or mud. Even a heated ga-rage can contribute to corrosion un-less it is well ventilated so moisture isdispersed.

E020D01A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in GoodCondition

Scratches or chips in the finish shouldbe covered with "touch-up" paint assoon as possible to reduce the possi-bility of corrosion. If bare metal is show-ing through, the attention of a qualifiedbody and paint shop is recommended.

E020E01A-AAT

Don't Neglect the Interior

Moisture can collect under the floormats and carpeting to cause corro-sion. Check under the mats periodi-cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.Use particular care if you carry fertiliz-ers, cleaning materials or chemicals inthe car.These should be carried only in propercontainers and any spills or leaksshould be cleaned up, flushed withclean water and thoroughly dried.

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is tokeep your car clean and free of corro-sive materials. Attention to the under-side of the car is particularly important.

o If you live in a high-corrosion area —where road salts are used, near theocean, areas with industrial pollu-tion, acid rain, etc.—, you shouldtake extra care to prevent corro-sion. In winter, hose off the under-side of your car at least once amonth and be sure to clean theunderside thoroughly when winteris over.

o When cleaning underneath the car,give particular attention to the com-ponents under the fenders and otherareas that are hidden from view. Doa thorough job; just dampening theaccumulated mud rather than wash-

ing it away will accelerate corrosionrather than prevent it. Water underhigh pressure and steam are par-ticularly effective in removing accu-mulated mud and corrosive materi-als.

o When cleaning lower door panels,rocker panels and frame members,be sure that drain holes are keptopen so that moisture can escapeand not be trapped inside to ac-celerate corrosion.

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion fromgetting started by observing the follow-ing:

TGgene-4.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM3


4 WASHING AND WAXING

E030A01A-AAT

Washing Your Hyundai

Never wash your car when the surfaceis hot from being in the sun. Alwayswash your car in the shade.

Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abra-sive and can scratch the paint if it is notremoved. Air pollution or acid rain maydamage the paint and trim throughchemical action if pollutants are al-lowed to remain in contact with thesurface. If you live near the ocean or inan area where road salts or dust con-trol chemicals are used, you shouldpay particular attention to the under-side of the car. Start by rinsing the carto remove dust and loose dirt. In win-ter, or if you have driven through mudor muddy water, be sure to thoroughlyclean the underside as well. Use ahard direct stream of water to removeaccumulations of mud or corrosivematerials. Use a good quality car-wash-ing solution and follow the manufac-turer's directions on the package.These are available at your Hyundaidealer or auto parts outlet. Don't usestrong household detergents, gasoline,

strong solvents or abrasive cleaningpowders as these may damage thefinish.Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse itfrequently and don't damage the finishby rubbing too hard. For stubborn spots,dampen them frequently and removethem a little at a time.To clean whitewall tires, use a stiffbrush or soapy steel-wool scouringpad.

To clean plastic wheel covers, use aclean sponge or soft cloth and water.

To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels,use a mild soap or neutral detergent.Do not use abrasive cleaners. Protectthe bare-metal surfaces by cleaning,polishing and waxing. Because alumi-num is subject to corrosion, be sure togive aluminum alloy wheels specialattention in winter. If you drive onsalted roads, clean the wheels thor-oughly afterwards.

After washing, be sure to rinse thor-oughly. If soapy water dries on thefinish, streaking will result.

When the weather is warm and thehumidity low, you may find it necessaryto rinse each section immediately afterwashing to avoid streaking.

After rinsing, dry the car using a dampchamois or soft, absorbent cloth. Thereason for drying the car is to removewater from the car so it will dry withoutwater spots. Don't rub, this can dam-age the finish.

If you find any nicks or scratches inthe paint, use touch-up paint to coverthem to prevent corrosion. To protectthe paintwork of the car against corro-sion, you must clean your Hyundai (atleast once a month). Give special at-tention to the removal of salt, mud andother substances on the underside ofthe splashboards of the car. Makesure that the outlets and the undersideof the doors are open. Paint damagecan be caused by small accumulationof tar, industrial precipitation, tree resin,insects and bird droppings, when notremoved immediately. If water alone isnot strong enough to remove the accu-mulated dirt, use a mild car washing

TGgene-4.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM4


5


5CLEANING THE INTERIOR

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

You should polish and wax the caragain when water no longer beads ona clean surface but spreads out over alarger area.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must be observedto preserve the appearance of thebumpers on your Hyundai. They are:

o Be careful not to spill battery elec-trolyte or hydraulic brake fluid on thebumpers. If you do, wash it offimmediately with clean water.

o Be gentle when cleaning the bumpersurfaces. They are made of softplastic and the surface can be dam-aged if mistreated. Do not use abra-sive cleaners. Use warm water andmild soap or car-washing solution.

o Do not expose the bumpers to hightemperatures. For example, if youhave your car repainted, do notleave the bumpers on the car if thecar is going to be placed in a high-temperature paint booth.

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first re-move loose dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Then apply a solution of mildsoap or detergent and water using aclean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this tostay on the surface to loosen the dirt,then wipe with a clean damp sponge orcloth. If all the dirt stains are not re-moved, repeat this procedure until theupholstery is clean. Do not use gaso-line, solvent, paint thinner or otherstrong cleaners.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning

Don't use gasoline, strong solvents orcorrosive cleaning agents. These candamage the finish of the car. To re-move road tar, use turpentine on aclean, soft cloth or commercially avail-able bug and tar remover. Be gentle.To remove dead insects or tree sap,use warm water and mild soap or car-washing solution. Soak the spot andrub gently. If the paint has lost itsluster, use a commercial car-cleaningpolish.

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing

Always wash and dry the car beforepolishing or waxing or using a combi-nation cleaner and wax. Use a goodquality commercial product and followthe manufacturer's directions on thecontainer. Polish and wax the brighttrim pieces as well as the paint.

solution. Be sure to rinse the surfaceafter washing to remove the solution.Never allow the solution to dry on thepainted surfaces.

TGgene-4.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM5


6

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any household windowcleaner on the windows. However,when cleaning the inside of the rearwindow be careful not to damage therear window defroster wiring.

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Clean-ers of this type are available in aerosolcans in liquid form or powder. Read theinstructions and follow them exactly.Using a vacuum cleaner with the ap-propriate attachment, remove as muchdirt from the carpets as possible. Applythe foam following the manufacturer'sdirections, then rub in overlappingcircles. Do not add water. These clean-ers work best when the carpet is keptas dry as possible.

E040B01A-AAT

To Clean the Leather Upholstery(If Installed)

In the normal course of use, leatherupholstered surfaces will, like anymaterial, pick-up dust and dirt. Thisdust and dirt must be cleaned off or itmay work into the surface of the leather,causing damage.

Fine leather needs care, and shouldbe cleaned when necessary. Washingleather thoroughly with soap and waterwill keep your leather lustrous, beauti-ful and ensure you have many years ofwear.Take a piece of cheese cloth and usingany mild soap and lukewarm water,work up a good lather. Thoroughlywash the leather. Wipe clean with aslightly damp cloth and dry with softcloth. Do this as often as the leatherbecomes soiled.

During tanning operations, sufficientoils are incorporated through process-ing that none need be applied duringthe life of the leather. Oil applied to thefinished surface will in no way help the

leather and may do more harm thangood. Varnishes and furniture polishesshould never be used under any con-ditions.

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, use a cloth orsponge with mild soap or detergentand warm water. Do not use strongdetergents, dye, bleach or abrasivematerials on the seat belts as this mayweaken the fabric.While cleaning the belts, inspect themfor excessive wear, cuts, fraying orother signs of damage and replacethem if necessary.

TGgene-4.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM6


7


7ANY QUESTIONS?

E050A01A-AAT

If you have any questions about thecare of your car, consult your Hyundaidealer.

TGgene-4.P65 6/9/2005, 6:00 PM7

Maintenance Intervals .................................................. 5-2Scheduled Maintenance ............................................... 5-4Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions ............ 5-6Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7

5

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5

TGgene-5.P65 6/9/2005, 3:44 PM1

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

2 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

F010C01A-GAT

Specified Scheduled Procedures

These are the procedures such asinspections, adjustments and replace-ments that are listed in the mainte-nance charts starting on page 5-4.These procedures must be performedat the intervals shown in the mainte-nance schedule to assure that yourwarranty remains in effect. Although itis strongly recommended that they beperformed by the factory-trained ordistributor-trained technicians at yourHyundai dealer, these procedures maybe performed at any qualified servicefacility.

F010D01A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checks youshould perform when you drive yourHyundai or you fill the fuel tank. A listof these items will be found on page 6-4.

F010A01A-GAT

Service Requirements

To assure that you receive the great-est number of kilometers of satisfyingoperation from your Hyundai, certainmaintenance procedures must be per-formed. Although careful design andengineering have reduced these to aminimum, those that are required areof the utmost importance.It is your responsibility to have thesemaintenance procedures performed tocomply with the terms of the warran-ties covering your new Hyundai. TheService Passport supplied with yournew vehicle provides further informa-tion about these warranties.

F010B01A-AAT

Maintenance Requirements

The maintenance required for yourHyundai can be divided into three mainareas:

o Specified scheduled procedureso General checkso Do-it-yourself maintenance

It is suggested that genuine Hyundaiservice parts be used for any requiredrepairs or replacements. Other parts ofequivalent quality such as engine oil,engine coolant, manual or autotransaxle oil, brake fluid and so onwhich are not supplied by HyundaiMotor Company or its distributor maybe used without affecting your war-ranty coverage but you should alwaysbe sure these are equivalent to thequality of the original Hyundai parts.Your Service Passport provides fur-ther information about your warrantycoverage.

TGgene-5.P65 6/9/2005, 3:44 PM2


3SCHEDULED MAINTE-NANCE REQUIREMENTS

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

If you are mechanically inclined, own afew tools that are required and want totake the time to do so, you can inspectand service a number of items. Formore information about doing it your-self, see Section 6.

F010F01A-GAT

A Few Tips

Whenever you have your Hyundai ser-viced, keep copies of the servicerecords in your glove box. This willhelp ensure that you can documentthat the required procedures have beenperformed to keep your warranties ineffect. This is especially importantwhen service is not performed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

F020A01Y-GAT

Inspection should be performed anytime a malfunction is experienced orsuspected. Receipts for all emissioncontrol system services should be re-tained to demonstrate compliance withconditions of the emissions systemwarranty.For severe usage maintenance require-ments, see page 5-6 of this section.

TGgene-5.P65 6/9/2005, 3:44 PM3


4

Note : (1) For every 40,000 km : "R"(2) For every 160,000 km : "R"(3) For every 96,000 km or 48 months, whichever occurs first : "I"(4) For every 20,000 km : "I"

NO.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

ENGINE OIL & FILTER

DRIVE BELT (AUTO-TENSIONER, ALTERNATOR, P/STR'G, W/PUMP)

FUEL FILTER (MPI TYPE)

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES & CONNECTIONS

VAPOR HOSE & FUEL FILLER CAP

VACUUM HOSE

CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSE

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS (Leaded)

SPARK PLUGS (Unleaded-IRIDIUM COATED)

VALVE CLEARANCE

FUEL TANK AIR FILTER

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL

F030A01A-GAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to assure good vehicle control and performance. Keep receipts forall vehicle services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determinedby whichever occurs first.

F030B01TG-GAT

R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

120

96

R

I

R

I

I

I

R

I

105

84

R

I

I

I

I

I

90

72

R

I

I

I

I

I

R

R

75

60

R

I

I

I

I

I

60

48

R

I

R

I

I

I

R

I

45

36

R

I

I

I

I

I

R

30

24

R

I

I

I

I

R

I

15

12

R

I

I

I

I

I

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHSDESCRIPTION

See Note (1)

See Note (2)

See Note (3)

See Note (4)

TGgene-5.P65 6/9/2005, 3:44 PM4


5

F030C01TG-GAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

Note : (1) For the first time, replace the coolant at 90,000 km or 60 months.After that, replace it every 45,000 km or 24 months.

(2) For every 45,000 km or 24 months, whichever occurs first : "R"

NO.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

DESCRIPTION

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

COOLING SYSTEM (Including coolant level adjustment)

COOLANT

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES

BRAKE FLUID

REAR DISC BRAKE/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

120

96

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

105

84

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

90

72

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

75

60

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

60

48

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

45

36

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

30

24

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

15

12

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

See Note (1)

See Note (2)

European Community Only

Except European Community



TGgene-5.P65 6/9/2005, 3:44 PM5


6

F040A01TG-GAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to thechart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

REAR DISC BRAKE/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

FLUID

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER

(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

R

R

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K

C, E

B, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G, H, I

C, D, E, F, H

A, C, E, F, G, H, I

C, E

MAINTENANCE ITEM



DRIVINGCONDITION

MAINTENANCEOPERATION

EVERY 7,500 KM OR 6 MONTHS

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 15,000 KM OR 6 MONTHS

EVERY 45,000 KM

EVERY 40,000 KM

MORE FREQUENTLY

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8km(5miles) innormal temperature or less than 16km(10miles) in freezingtemperature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distancesC - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-

spread roadsD - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very

cold weather

E - Driving in sandy areasF - Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C(90°F)G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towingJ - Driving over 170 Km/h(100 MPH)K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

TGgene-5.P65 6/9/2005, 3:44 PM6


7EXPLANATION OF SCHED-ULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should bechanged at the intervals specified inthe maintenance schedule. If the caris being driven in severe conditions,more frequent oil and filter changesare required.

F060B01NF-GAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence ofcuts, cracks, excessive wear or oilsaturation and replace if necessary.Drive belts should be checked periodi-cally for proper tension.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed atwhich the vehicle may be driven, dam-age the emission system and causehard starting. If an excessive amountof foreign matter accumulates in thefuel tank, the filter may require re-placement more frequently.After installing a new filter, run theengine for several minutes, and checkfor leaks at the connections. Fuel fil-ters should be installed by trainedtechnicians.

F060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses andConnections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses andconnections for leakage and damage.Have a trained technician replace anydamaged or leaking parts immediately.

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler capshould be inspected at those intervalsspecified in the maintenance sched-ule. Make sure that a new vapor hoseor fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

F060F01A-AAT

o Vacuum, CrankcaseVentilation Hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-dence of heat and/or mechanical dam-age. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking,tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessiveswelling indicate deterioration. Particu-lar attention should be paid to examinethose hose surfaces nearest to highheat sources, such as the exhaustmanifold.

TGgene-5.P65 6/9/2005, 3:44 PM7


8

F060H01A-AAT

o Air Cleaner Filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter isrecommended when filter is replaced.

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugsof the correct heat range.

F070C01A-AAT

o Coolant

The coolant should be changed atthe intervals specified in the mainte-nance schedule.

Inspect the hose routing to assure thatthe hoses do not come in contact withany heat source, sharp edges or mov-ing component which might cause heatdamage or mechanical wear. Inspectall hose connections, such as clampsand couplings, to make sure they aresecure, and that no leaks are present.Hoses should be replaced immedi-ately if there is any evidence of dete-rioration or damage.

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation,chafing, cracks, deterioration and anyleakage. Replace any deteriorated ordamaged parts immediately.

F070E04A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid

The fluid level should be in the "HOT"range of the dipstick, after the engineand transaxle are at normal operatingtemperature. Check the automatictransaxle fluid level with the enginerunning and the transaxle in neutral,with the parking brake properly ap-plied.Use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III,DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP IIIor other brands approved by HyundaiMotor Co., when adding or changingfluid.

F060N02E-AAT

o Valve Clearance

Inspect excessive valve noise and/orengine vibration and adjust if neces-sary. A qualified technician shouldperform the operation.

F070B01A-GAT

o Cooling System

Check the cooling system part, suchas radiator, coolant reservoir, hosesand connections for leakage and dam-age. Replace any damaged parts.

TGgene-5.P65 6/9/2005, 3:44 PM8


9

F070G02A-AAT

o Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir. The level should bebetween "MIN" and "MAX" marks onthe side of the reservoir. Use onlyhydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or DOT 4.

F070H01TG-AAT

o Rear Disc Brake /Linings, Parking Brake

Check the rear disc brake and liningsfor scoring, burning, leaking fluid, bro-ken parts, and excessive wear. In-spect the parking brake system in-cluding the parking brake pedal andcables. For detailed service proce-dures, refer to the Shop Manual.

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers andRotors

Check the pads for excessive wear,discs for run out and wear, and cali-pers for fluid leakage.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-rioration, or damage. Start the engineand listen carefully for any exhaustgas leakage. Tighten connections orreplace parts as necessary.

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections forlooseness or damage. Retighten to thespecified torque.

F070M01Y-AAT

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage &Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint,Upper Arm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and engineoff, check for excessive free-play inthe steering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or dam-age. Check the dust boots and balljoints for deterioration, cracks, or dam-age. Replace any damaged parts.

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump,Belt and Hoses

Check the power steering pump andhoses for leakage and damage. Re-place any damaged or leaking partsimmediately. Inspect the power steer-ing belt for evidence of cuts, cracks,excessive wear, oiliness and propertension. Replace or adjust it if neces-sary.

F070P01A-AAT

o Drive Shafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots andclamps for cracks, deterioration, ordamage. Replace any damaged partsand, if necessary, repack the grease.

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines andconnections for leakage and damage.Check air conditioning performanceaccording to the relevant shop manualif necessary.

TGgene-5.P65 6/9/2005, 3:44 PM9

Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2General Checks ........................................................... 6-3Maintenance Precautions ............................................. 6-4Checking the Engine Oil .............................................. 6-4Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ............... 6-7Spark Plugs .................................................................. 6-9Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ...................................6-10Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................6-13Checking the Brakes ..................................................6-15Air Conditioning Care ..................................................6-17Changing the Air conditioner Filter ..............................6-17Checking Drive Belts ..................................................6-20Checking and Replacing Fuses ..................................6-20Checking the Battery ..................................................6-22Checking the Eclectric Cooling Fans .........................6-24Power Steering Fluid Level .........................................6-24Headlight Aiming Adjustment ......................................6-25Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................6-27Bulb Wattage ...............................................................6-35Fuse Panel Description ...............................................6-36

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6 6

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM1

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2

G010A01TG-GAT

(3.3 V6)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010A01TG

CAUTION:When inspecting or servic-ing the engine, you shouldhandle tools and otherheavy objects carefully sothat the plastic cover of theengine is not damaged.

!

1. Coolant reservoir cap2. Engine oil filler cap3. Air cleaner4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Fuse and relay box6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir7. Power steering fluid reservoir8. Engine oil level dipstick

9. Automatic transaxle oil level dip-stick

10.Radiator cap11.Battery

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM2

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3GENERAL CHECKS

G020A01NF-GAT

Engine Compartment

The following should be checked regu-larly:

o Engine oil level and conditiono Transaxle fluid level and conditiono Brake fluid levelo Engine coolant levelo Windshield washer fluid levelo Accessory drive belt conditiono Engine coolant hose conditiono Fluid leaks (on or below compo-

nents)o Power steering fluid levelo Battery conditiono Air filter conditiono Immediate repairing when engine

trembling occurso Limit to restart more than 3 times

when engine cannot start

o Defroster, heating system operation(and air conditioning, If Installed)

o Steering operation and conditiono Mirror condition and operationo Turn signal operationo Accelerator pedal operationo Brake operation, including parking

brakeo Automatic transaxle operation, in-

cluding "Park" mechanism opera-tion

o Seat control condition and opera-tion

o Seat belt condition and operationo Sun visor operation

If you notice anything that does notoperate correctly or appears to befunctioning incorrectly, inspect it care-fully and seek assistance from yourHyundai dealer if service is needed.

G020B01A-AAT

Vehicle Exterior

The following should be checkedmonthly:

o Overall appearance and conditiono Wheel condition and wheel nut

torqueo Exhaust system conditiono Light condition and operationo Windshield glass conditiono Wiper blade conditiono Paint condition and body corrosiono Fluid leakso Door and hood lock conditiono Tire pressure and condition

(including spare tire)

G020C01TG-AAT

Vehicle Interior

The following should be checked eachtime when the vehicle is driven:

o Lights operationo Windshield wiper operationo Horn operation

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM3


4 MAINTENANCE PRECAU-TIONS

!G020D01TG-GAT

Improper or incomplete service mayresult in problems. This section givesinstructions only for the maintenanceitems that are easy to perform.Several procedures should be done byan authorized Hyundai dealer.

NOTE:Improper owner maintenance dur-ing the warranty period may affectwarranty coverage.

WARNING:o Performing maintenance work on

a vehicle can be dangerous. Youcan be seriously injured whileperforming some maintenanceprocedures. If you lack sufficientknowledge and experience or theproper tools and equipment to dothe work, have it done by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

o Working under the hood withtheengine running is dangerous. Itbecomes even moredangerouswhen you wearjewelry or looseclothing. These can becomeentangledin moving parts andresult ininjury. Therefore, if youmustrun the engine whileworkingunder the hood, makecertainthat you remove all jew-elry (especially rings, bracelets,watches, and necklaces) andallneckties, scarves, and similarloose clothing before getting nearthe engine or cooling fans.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030A02O-GAT

Recommended Oil

Engine oil is essential to the perfor-mance and service of the engine. It issuggested that you check the oil levelat least once a week in normal useand more often if you are on a trip ordriving in severe conditions.

The engine oil quality should meetthe following classification.

API SJ, SL or ABOVE,ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

G030B01JM

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM4


5

NOTE:o For good fuel economy, SAE

5W-20 (5W-30), ILSAC GF-3 en-gine oil is preferred regardlessof regional option and enginevariation.

o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 en-gine oil is not available, second-ary recommended engine oil forcorresponding temperaturerange can be used.

Before checking the oil, warm up theengine to the normal operating tem-perature and be sure your car isparked on level ground. Turn the en-gine off.

Wait about five minutes, then removethe dipstick, wipe it off, fully reinsertthe dipstick and withdraw it again.Then note the highest level the oil hasreached on the dipstick. It should bebetween the upper ("F") and lower("L") range.

G030C02JM-AAT

To Check the Oil Level

G030C01TG

WARNING:Be very careful not to touch theradiator hose when checking theengine oil as it may be hot enoughto burn you.

!

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM5


6

!!

CAUTION:Slowly pour the recommended oilusing by a funnel. Do not overfillnot to damage engine.

WARNING:Be very careful not to touch theradiator hose when adding the en-gine oil as it may be hot enough toburn you.

!NOTE:Always dispose of used engine oilin an environmentally acceptablemanner. It is suggested that it beplaced in a sealed container andtaken to a service station for recla-mation. Do not pour the oil on theground or put it into the householdtrash.

WARNING:Used motor oil may cause irritationor cancer of the skin if left in contactwith the skin for prolonged periodsof time. Wash your hands thoroughlywith soap and warm water as soonas possible after handling used oil.

G030D01TG-GAT

Adding Oil

If the oil level is close to or below the"L" mark, add oil until it reaches the"F" mark. To add oil:

1. Remove the oil filler cap by turningit counterclockwise.

2. Add oil, then check the level again.Do not overfill.

3. Replace the cap by turning it clock-wise.

The distance between the "F" and "L"marks is equal to about 1 liter of oil.

G030D01TG

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM6


7

G350A01A-GAT

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTIONFunction of Engine Oil

Engine oil has the primary function oflubricating and cooling the inside ofthe engine.

Engine oil consumption

It is normal that an engine shouldconsume some engine oil while nor-mal driving. The cause of oil con-sumption in a normal engine are asfollows;

o Engine oil is used to lubricate pis-tons, piston rings and cylinders.A thin film of oil is left on thecylinder wall when a piston movesdownwards in the cylinder. Highnegative pressure generated dur-ing engine operation sucks someof the oil into the combustion cham-ber.This oil with some oil of the cylin-der wall is burned by the high tem-perature combustion gases duringthe combustion process.

o The engine oil consumption isstrongly effected by the viscosityand quality of oil, engine rpm anddriving condition etc. The engineoil is more consumed under severedriving conditions such as highspeeds and frequent accelerationand deceleration than normal driv-ing condition.

!

CHECKING AND CHANGINGTHE ENGINE COOLANT

G050A01TG-AAT

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot. When theengine is hot, the engine coolantis under pressure and may eruptthrough the opening if the cap isremoved. You could be seriouslyburned if you do not observe thisprecaution. Do not remove theradiator cap until the radiator iscool to the touch.

NOTE:It is recommended that the enginecoolant should be changed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM7


8

!

The coolant level can be seen on theside of the plastic coolant reservoir.The level of the coolant should bebetween the "L" and "F" lines on thereservoir when the engine is warmwith it at idle . If the level is below the"L" mark, add engine coolant to bringit up to "F". If the level is low, inspectfor coolant leaks and recheck thefluid level frequently. If the level dropsagain, visit your Hyundai dealer for aninspection and diagnosis of the rea-son.

G050C01TG-GAT

To Check the Coolant Level

G050C01TG

Ambient

temperature

°C ( °F)

-15 (5)

-25 (-13)

-35 (-31)

-45 (-49)

65%

60%

50%

40%

35%

40%

50%

60%

WaterAntifreeze

solution

Engine Coolant concentration

CAUTION:o Engine coolant can damage the

finish of your car. If you spillengine coolant on the car, wash itoff thoroughly with clean water.

o The engine in your vehicle hasaluminum engine parts and mustbe protected by an ethylene-gly-col base coolant to prevent corro-sion and freezing.And, do not use the hard water.The hard water can cause enginedamage from corrosion, overheat-ing or freezing.

!

G050B01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

Use a high quality ethylene-glycolcoolant in a 50/50 mix with water. Theengine coolant should be compatiblewith aluminum engine parts. Addi-tional corrosion inhibitors or additivesshould not be used. The cooling sys-tem must be maintained with the cor-rect concentration and type of enginecoolant to prevent freezing and corro-sion.

CAUTION:Never allow the concentration ofantifreeze to exceed the 60% levelor go below the 35% level, or dam-age to the cooling system mayresult.

For proper concentration when addingor replacing the engine coolant, referto the following table.

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM8


9

! WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled byengine coolant temperature and maysometimes operate even when theengine is not running. Use extremecaution when working near theblades of the coolant fan so that youare not injured by a rotating fanblade. As the engine coolant tem-perature decreases, the fan will au-tomatically shut off. This is a nor-mal condition.

SPARK PLUGS

G060A01TG-GAT

G060A01L

Your engine was originally equippedwith Iridium-tipped spark plugs (For3.3L unleaded only).Iridium-tipped spark plugs will lastlonger than conventional type sparkplugs and can be identified by bluelines on the ceramic shell.

NOTE:Do not clean or regap Iridium-tipped spark plugs.

G060B01TG-GAT

Replacing the Spark Plugs

The spark plugs should be changedat the intervals specified in the ve-hicle maintenance schedule in Sec-tion 5 or whenever engine perfor-mance indicates they should bechanged. Symptoms that suggest poorspark plug performance include en-gine misfiring under load, loss of fueleconomy, poor acceleration, etc.When spark plugs are replaced, al-ways use spark plugs recommendedby Hyundai. The use of other sparkplugs can result in loss of perfor-mance, radio interference or enginedamage.

NOTE:o It is recommended that spark

plugs should be changed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

o When replacing the spark plugs,always use the genuine parts rec-ommended.

Unleaded : 1.0~1.1 mmLeaded : 0.7~0.8 mm

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM9


10

CAUTION:o Operating your vehicle without

using a proper air cleaner filterin place can result in excessiveengine wear.

o When removing the air cleanerfilter, be careful that dust or dirtdoes not enter the air intake.These may result in damage tothe air cleaner filter.

!

CHANGING THE AIRCLEANER FILTER

G070A03Y-AAT

The replacement of the air cleanerfilter is performed in the followingmanner.

1. Unsnap the clips around the cover.2. When this is done, the cover can

be lifted off, the old filter removedand the new filter put in its place.

Genuine Hyundai replacement partsare recommended.

HTG5013

Remark

Unleaded

Leaded

Recommended Spark Plugs:

* Iridium coated.

Type

IFR5G-11*

BKR5ES

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM10


11WINDSHIELD WIPERBLADES

G080A02A-AAT

The wiper blades should be carefullyinspected from time to time andcleaned to remove accumulations ofroad film or other debris. To clean thewiper blades and arms, use a cleansponge or cloth with a mild soap ordetergent and water. If the wiperscontinue to streak or smear the glass,replace them with genuine Hyundaireplacement parts or their equivalent.

G080A01TG

CAUTION:o Do not operate the wipers on

dry glass. This can result in morerapid wear of the wiper bladesand may scratch the glass.

o Keep the blade rubber out ofcontact with petroleum productssuch as engine oil, gasoline etc.

!G080B01TG-GAT

REPLACING THE WIND-SHIELD WIPER BLADES

Replacing driver's side wind-shield wiper blade

To replace the wiper blades, raise thewiper to the vertical position.

To remove the wiper blade

1. Push down the wiper blade with thelocking clip (1) pressed to detach itfrom the wiper arm.

HHR5048

(1)

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM11


12

Replacing passenger's sidewindshield wiper blade

1. Place the windshied wiper switch tothe "OFF" position, raise the wind-shield wiper arm about 10 mm fromthe windshied as illustrated.

NOTE:Be careful not to scratch the wind-shield wiper arm against the hood.

G080B01TG

2. Raise the wiper blade lightly andpull it up.

To install the wiper blade

HHR5049

HHR5050

1. Put a new wiper blade onto thewiper arm and lower the wiper bladeat the level of the wiper arm asshown in the drawing.

2. Pull up the wiper blade until youhear an audible "click" to engage inthe end of the wiper arm.

NOTE:Do not allow the wiper arm to fallagainst the windshield.

HHR5051

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM12


13

G080B04TG2. Remove the windshield wiper blade

with the "LOCK" lever pressed.

G080B02TG

G080B03TG

FILLING THE WASHERRESERVOIR

G090A01NF-GAT

HTG5014-1

The washer fluid reservoir suppliesfluid to the windshield washer sys-tem.A good quality washer fluid should beused to fill the washer reservoir. Thefluid level should be checked morefrequently during bad weather orwhenever the washer system is inmore frequent use.The capacity of the washer reservoiris 4.0 liters (3.2 U.S. quarts).

3. Replace with a new wiper blade.

Alternatively, you can replace the wind-shield wiper blade as follows.

1. Turn the ignition switch "ON" andplace the windshield wiper switch tothe "LO" position. Turn the ignitionswitch "OFF" when the windshieldwiper is in the fully up position. Thewindshield wiper will stop as illus-trated.

2. Replace the wiper blade as de-scribed in the section of the driver'sside replacement.

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM13


14

CAUTION:o Radiator antifreeze (engine cool-

ant) should not be used in thewasher system because it willdamage the car's finish.

o The washer lever should not bepulled and the washer shouldnot be operated if the washerreservoir is empty. This can dam-age the washer fluid pump.

!

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLEFLUID (AUTOMATIC)

G110A01E-AAT

Transaxle fluid in the automatictransaxle should be checked at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle main-tenance schedule in Section 5.

NOTE:Automatic transaxle fluid is basi-cally red color. As driving distanceincreases, the fluid color turns dark-ish red gradually. It is a normalcondition and you should not judgethe need to replace based upon thechanging color.You must replace the automatictransaxle fluid in accordance withintervals specified in the vehiclemaintenance schedule in section 5.

! WARNING:o Windshield washer fluid agents

contain some amounts of alco-hol and can be flammable undercertain circumstances. Do notallow sparks or flame to contactthe washer fluid or the washerfluid reservoir. Damage to thevehicle or its occupants couldoccur.

o Windshield washer fluid is poi-sonous to humans and animals.Do not drink windshield washerfluid. Serious injury or deathcould occur.

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM14


15

!

1. Open the hood, being careful tokeep hands, long hair and clothingclear of any moving parts.

2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipeit clean, reinsert the dipstick as faras it will go, then remove it again.Now check the fluid level on thedipstick. It should be in the "HOT"range on the dipstick.

HTG5012

G110C01TG-GAT

Transaxle Fluid Capacity

The fluid capacity of the automatictransaxle is 10.9 liters.

WARNING:The transaxle fluid level should bechecked when the engine is atnormal operating temperature. Thismeans that the engine, radiator,radiator hose, exhaust system, etc.,are very hot. Exercise great carenot to burn yourself during thisprocedure.

G110D02L-AAT

To Check the Transaxle FluidLevel

Park the car on level ground with theparking brake engaged. When thetransaxle fluid level is checked, thetransaxle fluid should be at normaloperating temperature and the en-gine idling.

While the engine is idling, apply thebrakes and move the gear selectorlever from "P" to each of its otherpositions — "R", "N", "D" — and thenreturn to "N" or "P". With the enginestill idling:

G110D01TG

G110B04A-AAT

Recommended Fluid

Your Hyundai automatic transaxle isspecially designed to operate withHyundai Genuine ATF SP-III, DIA-MOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP-III orother brands approved by HyundaiMotor Co., Damage caused by anonspecified fluid is not covered byyour new vehicle limited warranty.

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM15


16

!

!

G110D02NF

Fluid level should be within "HOT"range

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled byengine coolant temperature andmay sometimes operate even whenthe engine is not running. Useextreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fanso that you are not injured by arotating fan blade. As the enginecoolant temperature decreases, thefan will automatically shut off. Thisis a normal condition.

3. If the transaxle fluid level is low,use a funnel to add transaxle fluidthrough the dipstick tube until thelevel reaches the "HOT" range. Donot overfill.

CHECKING THE BRAKES

G120A01A-AAT

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

! CAUTION:Because brakes are essential tothe safe operation of the car, it issuggested that they be checkedand inspected by your Hyundaidealer. The brakes should bechecked and inspected for wear atthose intervals specified in thevehicle maintenance schedule inSection 5.

WARNING:Use caution when handling brakefluid. It can damage your vision ifit gets into your eyes. It will alsodamage your vehicle's paint ifspilled on it and not removed im-mediately.

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM16


17

!

To add brake fluid, first wipe awayany dirt then unscrew the fluid reser-voir cap. Slowly pour the recom-mended fluid into the reservoir. Donot overfill. Carefully replace the capon the reservoir and tighten.

G120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It candamage your vision if it gets intoyour eyes. Use only DOT 3 or DOT4 specification fluid from a sealedcontainer. Do not allow the fluidcan or reservoir to remain openany longer than required. This willprevent entry of dirt and moisturewhich can damage the brake sys-tem and cause improper opera-tion.

HTG5015

G120C02A-AAT

Recommended Brake Fluid

Use only hydraulic brake fluid con-forming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifica-tions in your braking system. Followthe instructions printed on the con-tainer.

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

The fluid level in the brake fluid reser-voir should be checked periodically.The level should be between the "MIN"and "MAX" marks on the side of thereservoir. If the level is at or belowthe "MIN" mark, carefully add fluid tobring it up to "MAX". Do not overfill.

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM17


18

G140C01A-AAT

Lubrication

To lubricate the compressor and theseals in the system, the air condition-ing should be run for at least 10minutes each week. This is particu-larly important during cool weatherwhen the air conditioning system isnot otherwise in use.

CHANGING THE AIRCONDITIONER FILTER

B145A01TG-GAT

(For Evaporator and Blower Unit)(If Installed)

The air conditioner filter is located inthe upper portion of the blower fan.It helps to decrease the amount ofpollutants entering the car.

1. Open the glove box.2. Pull the glove box cylinder to unlock

the glove box fixing device.

HTG2167

G140B01A-AAT

Checking the Air ConditioningOperation

1. Start the engine and let it run atfast idle for several minutes withthe air conditioning set at the maxi-mum cold setting.

2. If the air coming out of the in-dashvents is not cold, have the air con-ditioning system inspected by yourHyundai dealer.

CAUTION:Running the air conditioning sys-tem for extended periods of timewith a low refrigerant level maydamage the compressor.

!

AIR CONDITIONING CARE

G140A01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean

The air conditioning condenser (andengine radiator) should be checkedperiodically for accumulation of dirt,dead insects, leaves, etc. These caninterfere with maximum cooling effi-ciency. When removing such accu-mulations, brush or hose them awaycarefully to avoid bending the coolingfans.

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM18


19

3. Lower the glove box down com-pletely by pushing both sides of theglove box inward.

HTG2168

4. Pull out the air conditioner filter withthe hooks on both sides pressed.

HNF2164 HNF2165

!CAUTION:Be careful not to press the hooks inthe opposite direction.

5. Replace the air conditioner filter bylifting it.

6. Installation is the reverse order ofdisassembly.

CAUTION:To prevent pollutants from enteringthe car, be sure to install the airconditioner filter exactly.

!

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM19


20

G180A01L

18 mm(0.7 in.)

You need a helper to check the brakepedal clearance. With the engine run-ning, have your helper press down onthe brake pedal several times and thenhold it down with a force of about 490N(50 kg, 110 lbs). The brake pedalclearance is the distance from the topsurface of the brake pedal to the as-phalt sheeting under the floor mat. Ifthe brake pedal clearance is not withinthe limits specified in the illustration,have it inspected by your Hyundaidealer and adjusted or repaired if nec-essary.

With the engine off, press down on thebrake pedal several times to reducethe vacuum in the brake booster.Then, using your hand, press downslowly on the brake pedal until youfeel a change in resistance. This isthe brake pedal free-play. The free-play should be within the limits speci-fied in the illustration. If it is not, haveit inspected by your Hyundai dealerand adjusted or repaired if necessary.

G160A01TG

3~8 mm(0.12~0.31 in.)

To check the steering wheel free-play,stop the car with the wheels pointedstraight ahead and gently move thesteering wheel back and forth. Usevery light finger pressure and be sen-sitive to changes in resistance thatmark the limits of the free-play. If thefreeplay is greater than specified, haveit inspected by your Hyundai dealerand adjusted or repaired if necessary.

HTG5020

Maximum30 mm(1.18 in.)

CHECKING STEERINGWHEEL FREE-PLAY

G150A01A-GAT

CHECKING BRAKE PEDALFREE-PLAY

G170A01A-GAT

CHECKING BRAKE PEDALCLEARANCE

G180A01A-GAT

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM20


21

G190A02NF-GAT

Drive belts should be checked periodi-cally for proper tension. At the sametime, belts should be examined forcracks, wear, fraying or other evidenceof deterioration and replaced if neces-sary.When a new belt is replaced, the beltshould be located within the pulley offlat idler.Belt routing should also be checkedto be sure there is no interferencebetween the belts and other parts ofthe engine.

NOTE:Drive belt tension is adjusted auto-matically by the auto tensioner.

CHECKING DRIVE BELTS

G140D02NF

Power steering

COMP

Water pump pully

Generator

Damper pulley

Auto tensioner

CHECKING AND REPLAC-ING FUSES

G200A01A-GAT

Replacing a Fusible Link

A fusible link will melt if the electricalcircuits from the battery are ever over-loaded, thus preventing damage tothe entire wiring harness. (This couldbe caused by a short in the systemdrawing too much current.) If thisever happens, have a Hyundai dealerdetermine the cause, repair the sys-tem and replace the fusible link. Thefusible links are located in a relay boxfor easy inspection.

HNF4004

The parking brake pedal should bechecked periodically for proper stroke.If you feel loose in the parking brakepedal when the parking brake is en-gaged, have your parking brake ad-justed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

CHECKING PARKINGBRAKE PEDAL

G185A01TG-GAT

CAUTION:If the parking brake pedal is notadjusted properly, the vehicle mayroll backwards when parking on asteep hill.

!

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM21


22

1. Turn off the ignition and all otherswitches.

2. Open the fuse box and examineeach fuse. Remove each fuse bypulling it toward you (a small "fusepuller" tool is contained in the relayand fuse box of the engine room tosimplify this operation).

G200B02NF

3. Be sure to check all other fuseseven if you find one that appears tohave burned out.

G200B01NF-GAT

Replacing Accessory Fuse

G200B01TG

The fuse box for the lights and otherelectrical accessories will be found inthe left side of the crash pad. Insidethe box you will find a list showing thecircuits protected by each fuse.If any of your car's lights or otherelectrical accessories stop working, ablown fuse could be the reason. If thefuse has burned out, you will see thatthe metal strip inside the fuse hasburned through. If you suspect a blownfuse, follow this procedure:

CAUTION:When replacing a fusible link, neveruse anything but a new fusiblelink with the same or lower amper-age rating. Never use a piece ofwire or a higher-rated fusible link.This could result in serious dam-age and create a fire hazard.

!

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM22


23

CAUTION:A burned-out fuse indicates thatthere is a problem in the electricalcircuit. If you replace a fuse and itblows as soon as the accessory isturned on, the problem is seriousand should be referred to aHyundai dealer for diagnosis andrepair. Never replace a fuse withanything except a fuse with thesame or a lower amperage rating.A higher capacity fuse could causedamage and create a fire hazard.

NOTE:See page 6-42 for the fuse paneldescriptions.

!

CHECKING THE BATTERY

G210A01A-AAT

WARNING:Batteries can be dangerous! Whenworking with batteries, carefullyobserve the following precautionsto avoid serious injuries.

The fluid in the battery contains astrong solution of sulfuric acid, whichis poisonous and highly corrosive. Becareful not to spill it on yourself or thecar. If you do spill battery fluid onyourself, immediately do the follow-ing:

HTG5019

!4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing

a new fuse of the same rating intoplace. The fuse should be a snugfit. If it is not, have the fuse cliprepaired or replaced by a Hyundaidealer. If you do not have a sparefuse, you may be able to borrow afuse of the same or lower ratingfrom an accessory you can tempo-rarily get along without (the radio orcigarette lighter, for example). Al-ways remember to replace the bor-rowed fuse.

G200B02L

Good Burned out

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM23


24

Keep batteries out of thereach of children becausebatteries contain highlycorrosive SULFURIC ACID.Do not allow battery acidto contact your skin, eyes,clothing or paint finish.If any electrolyte gets intoyour eyes, flush your eyeswith clean water for at least15 minutes and get imme-diate medical attention. Ifpossible, continue to ap-ply water with a sponge orcloth until medical atten-tion is received.If electrolyte gets on yourskin, thoroughly wash thecontacted area.If you feel a pain or a burn-ing sensation, get medi-cal attention immediately.Wear eye protection whencharging or working neara battery.Always provide ventilationwhen working in an en-closed space.

!

G210B01Y-GAT

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Any evidenceof corrosion around the battery postsor terminals should be removed usinga solution of household baking sodaand warm water. After the batteryterminals are dry, cover them with alight coating of grease.

WARNING:Always read the followinginstructions carefullywhen handling a battery.Keep lighted cigarettesand all other flames orsparks away from the bat-tery.Hydrogen, which is ahighly combustible gas, isalways present in batterycells and may explode ifignited.

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flushthe affected areas with water for atleast 15 minutes and then seekmedical assistance.

o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinseout your eyes with water and getmedical assistance as soon aspossible. While you are being drivento get medical assistance, continueto rinse your eyes by using asponge or soft cloth saturated withwater.

o If you swallow battery fluid, drink alarge quantity of water or milk fol-lowed by milk of magnesia, eat araw egg or drink vegetable oil. Getmedical assistance as soon aspossible.

While batteries are being charged(either by a battery charger or by thevehicle's alternator), they produceexplosive gases. Always observethese warnings to prevent injuries fromoccurring:

o Charge batteries only in a well ven-tilated area.

o Do not permit flames, sparks orsmoking in the area.

o Keep children away from the area.

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM24


25

!

CHECKING ELECTRICCOOLING FANS

G220A01A-AAT

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled byengine coolant temperature andmay sometimes operate even whenthe engine is not running. Useextreme caution when working nearthe blades of the cooling fan, sothat you are not injured by a rotat-ing fan blade. As the engine cool-ant temperature decreases the fanwill automatically shut off. This isa normal condition.

G220B01NF-GAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

The engine cooling fan should comeon automatically if the engine coolanttemperature is high or whenever theair conditioning is in operation.

POWER STEERING FLUIDLEVEL

G230A03A-GAT

The power steering fluid level shouldbe checked regularly.To check the power steering fluid level,be sure the ignition is "OFF", thencheck to make certain that the powersteering fluid level is between the"MAX" and "MIN" level markings onthe fluid reservoir.

HTG5014

o When lifting a plastic-cased bat-tery, excessive pressure on thecase may cause battery acid toleak, resulting in personal injury.Lift with a battery carrier or withyour hands on opposite corners.

o Never attempt to charge the bat-tery when the battery cables areconnected.

o The electrical ignition systemworks with high voltage.Never touch these componentswith the engine running or theignition switched on.

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM25


26 HEADLIGHT AIMINGADJUSTMENT

G290A01TG-GAT

G290A01NF

Before performing aiming adjustment,make sure of the following.

1. Keep all tires inflated to the correctpressure.

2. Place the vehicle on level groundand press the front bumper & rearbumper down several times. Placevehicle at a distance of 3m (118in.) from the test wall.

3. See that the vehicle is unloaded(except for full levels of coolant,engine oil and fuel, and spare tire,jack, and tools). Have the driver orequivalent weight placed in driver'sseat.

Verticalaiming

Horizontalaiming

4. Clean the headlight lenses and turnon the headlights (Low Beam orHigh Beam)

5. Open the hood.6. Draw the vertical line (through the

center of each headlight beam pat-tern) and the horizontal line (throughthe center of each headlight beampattern) on the aiming screen.And then, draw the parallel line at30 mm (1.18 in.) under the hori-zontal line.

7. Adjust each cut-off line of the lowbeam to the parallel line with aphillips screwdriver - VERTICALAIMING.

8. Adjust each cut-off line of the lowbeam to the each vertical line witha phillips screwdriver - HORIZON-TAL AIMING.

NOTE:Grinding noise from the powersteering pump may be heard im-mediately after the engine is startedin extremely cold conditions (be-low - 20°C). If the noise stops dur-ing warm up, there is no abnormalfunction in the system. It is due to apower steering fluid characteristicin extremely cold conditions.

Recommended FluidUse PSF-3 type fluid.

NOTE:Do not start the engine when thepower steering oil reservoir isempty.

G240A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING HOSES

It is suggested that you check thepower steering hose connections forfluid leakage at regular intervals. Thepower steering hoses should be re-placed if there is severe surface crack-ing, pulling, scuffing or worn spots.Deterioration of the hose could causepremature failure.

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM26


27

G290B01TG-GAT

Adjustment After Headlight As-sembly Replacement

G290B01B

L

W

H

H

Cut-off line

G r o u n dline

"P"Horizontal line

Vertical lineLeft-Hand Drive (Low Beam)

30 mm

L

G290B01JM-D

W

H

Cut-off line

"P"

Vertical line

Horizontal line

Groundline

Right-Hand Drive

30 mm

If the vehicle has had front body repairand the headlight assembly has beenreplaced, the headlight aiming shouldbe checked using the aiming screenas shown in the illustration. Turn onthe headlight switch (Low Beam Posi-tion or High Beam Position).

1. Adjust headlights so that main axisof light is parallel to the center lineof the body and is aligned withpoint "P" shown in the illustration.

2. Dotted lines in the illustration showthe center of the headlights.

SPECIFICATION:

"H"Horizontal center line of headlightsfrom ground;Low Beam : 691 mm (27.2 in.)High Beam : 680 mm (26.77 in.)

"W"Distance between each headlight cen-ter;Low Beam : 1,350 mm (53.14 in.)High Beam : 1,080 mm (42.51 in.)

"L"Distance between the headlights andthe wall that the lights are testedagainst: 3,000 mm (118.11 in.)

G290B01S-1

LH

Cut-off line

G r o u n dline

Horizontal line Verticalline

Left-Hand Drive (High Beam)

H

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM27


28

Replacement instructions:

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eyeprotection.

2. Open the engine hood and discon-nect the negative (-) post of thebattery.

3. Always grasp the bulb by its plasticbase, avoid touching the glass.

G270A01TG-GAT

HEADLIGHT AND FRONT FOGLIGHT Headlight

(High beam)Headlight(Low beam)

G270A01TG

Front Fog Light

REPLACEMENT OF LIGHTBULBS

G260A01TG-GAT

Before attempting to replace a lightbulb, be sure the ignition switch isturned to the "OFF" position.The next paragraph shows how toreach the light bulbs so they may bechanged. Be sure to replace theburned-out bulb with one of the samenumber and wattage rating.See page 6-41 for the wattage de-scriptions.

! CAUTION:o Keep the lights out of contact

with petroleum products, suchas oil, gasoline, etc.

o Be sure to replace the LED typeequipped bulbs with an assem-bly.

o If you don't have necessary tools,the correct bulbs and the exper-tise, consult your authorizedHyundai dealer.

CAUTION:o The headlight aiming should be

checked by an authorized Hyundaidealer after replacing the head-light bulbs.

o If your vehicle is equipped withHID (High Intensity Discharge) typeheadlight, you must not replaceor inspect the headlight.It has a danger of an electricshock. If the headlight is not work-ing, have your vehicle inspectedby your Hyundai Dealer.

!

Headlight

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM28


29

G270A02TG

4. Using a spanner of the correct size,remove the headlight assemblymounting bolts and nut.

G270A03TG

5. Disconnect the power cord from theback of the headlight.

HTG5024

6. Turn the plastic cover counterclock-wise and remove it.

HTG5025

7. Disconnect the connector from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.

8. Push the bulb spring to remove theheadlight bulb.

HTG5026

9. Remove the protective cap fromthe replacement bulb and installthe new bulb by matching theplastic base with the headlighthole. Reattach the bulb spring andreconnect the connector.

10. Use the protective cap and cartonto promptly dispose of the oldbulb.

11. Check for proper headlight aim.

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM29


30

!WARNING:

This halogen bulb contains gasunder pressure and, if impacted,could shatter, resulting in flying frag-ments. Always wear eye protectionwhen servicing the bulb. Protect thebulb against abrasions or scratchesand against liquids when lighted.Turn the bulb on only when install-ing in a headlight. Replace the head-light if damaged or cracked. Keepthe bulb out of the reach of childrenand dispose of the used bulb withcare.

G270A03O

Front Fog Light (If Installed)

NOTE:It is recommended that the front foglight bulb be replaced by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer.

G275A01TG-GAT

FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

1. Open the engine hood and discon-nect the negative (-) post of thebattery.

HTG5045

2. Turn the wheel inside until the wheelhousing is visible.

3. Remove the mounting screws of thecover with a phillips screwdriver andopen the cover.

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM30


31

4. Take out the bulb from the bulbholder by turning it counterclock-wise.

5. Install the new bulb.

HTG5046

G270D01TG-GAT

REAR COMBINATION LIGHT

2. Remove the cover on the inside ofrear luggage trim by turning theknob counterclockwise.

G270D02TGStop/Tail Light

NOTE:The stop/tail light should be re-placed by an authorized Hyundaidealer because the light is LED (LightEmitting Diode) type.

G270D01TG

Turn Signal Light

1. Open the trunk lid.

Stop/Tail lightTail light

Turn signal lightFog light(If installed)

Back-up light

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM31


32

3. To replace the turn signal light,remove it from the bulb holder andinstall the new bulb.

G270D03TG

HTG5042

2. Loosen the mounting screws of thetrunk lid trim with a phillips screw-driver and remove the trunk lid trim.

Back-up Light


3. To replace the back-up light, re-move the socket by turning it coun-terclockwise.

4. Install the new bulb.

HTG5030

Rear Fog Light (If Installed)

NOTE:The rear fog light should be re-placed by an authorized Hyundaidealer because the light is LED (LightEmitting Diode) type.

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM32


33

G270E01A-GAT

SIDE REPEATER LIGHT

1. Push the cover toward the front ofvehicle and remove it.

G270E01TG

G270C01L-GAT

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTLIGHT


2. Remove the luggage compartmentlight cover on the rear packagetray panel with a blade screwdriver.

HTG5031

HNF5032

3. Disconnect the power cord.

4. Replace with a new bulb.

HTB284

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM33


34

2. Disconnect the power code.G270E02TG

HNF5019

G270G01L-GAT

INTERIOR LIGHT

G270G01TG

1. Remove the plastic cover with ablade screwdriver.

G270G02TG

G270L01TG

G270L02TG

G270L01L-GAT

MAP LIGHT

1. Remove the plastic cover with ablade screwdriver.




TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM34


35

G270K02TG


G270K01TG-GAT

GLOVE BOX ILLUMINATEDLIGHT

1. Open the glove box.

2. Remove the glove box illuminatedlight cover with a blade screwdriver.

G270K01TG

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:01 PM35


36

Socket Type

P14,5s/PX26d

PK32d-2

BAU15s

W2.1X9.5d

S8.5

BA9s

W2.1X9.5d

PGJ19-1

W2.1X9.5d

BULB WATTAGE

G280A01TG-GAT

G280A01TG

Part Name

Door Edge Warning Light

Stop/Tail Light

Tail Light

High Mounted Rear Stop Light

Luggage Compartment Light

Rear Turn Signal Light

Back-up Light

Rear Fog Light (If Installed)

License Plate Light

Part Name

Headlight (High/Low)

HID Headlight (Low)

(If Installed)

Front Turn Signal Light

Front Map Light

Interior Light

Rear Map Light

Front Position Light

Front Fog Light

Side Repeater Light

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

No.

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Wattage

55/55

35

21

10

10

10

5

35

5

Wattage

5

2.4/0.4

0.4

1

5

21

16

4.6

5

Socket Type

-

LED Type

LED Type

LED Type

S8.5

BAU15s

W2.1X9.5d

LED Type

W2.1X9.5d

TGgene-6.P65 6/10/2005, 4:30 PM36


37FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200C01TG-GAT

Engine Compartment

NOTE:Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time ofprinting. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

HTG4005

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM37


38

123456789101112131415161718192021222324

HORNTAILECUIG1DRL

FR FOGA/CON

F/PUMPDIODE

ATMSTOP

H/LP LO RHS/ROOF

H/LP WASHERH/LP HI

ECU (B+)SNSR3SNSR1SNSR2B/UP

IGN COILECU (IG1)H/LP LO

ABS

PROTECTED COMPONENTSABS/ESP Control module, Multipurpose check connectorABS/ESP Control module, Multipurpose check connectorFuse(FR P/SEAT, T/LID, T/SIG, TILT, PEDAL, RR CURTAIN)Defogger relayBlower relayFuse(P/WDW LH, P/WDW RH)Start relay, Ignition switch(IG2, START)Engine control unit relayFuse(KEY SOL, ECS/RR FOG), Power connectorIgnition switch(ACC, IG1)Fusible link(ABS1, ABS2, RR HTD, BLOWER)Horn relayTail light relayPCM(Spare)Burglar alarm horn relayFront fog light relayA/C RelayFuel pump relay(Spare)ATM Control relayStop light switchHID RelayOverhead console lampHeadlight washer motorHeadlight relay (HIGH)PCMInjector#1~#6, A/C Relay, Cooling fan relayMass air flow sensor, PCM, Immobilizer control module, Oil control valve#1/#2, Variable intake manifold valveOxygen Sensor#1~#4Back-up light switch, Stop light switch, Transaxle range switch, Vehicle speed sensorIgnition coil#1~#6, CondenserPCMHeadlight relay(LOW)ABS/ESP Control module, Multipurpose check connector

ABS1ABS2

I/P (B+)1RR HTDBLOWERP/WDW

IGN2ECU RLYI/P (B+)2

IGN1ALT

FUSE RATING40A20A40A40A40A40A40A30A30A30A150A15A20A10A10A15A15A10A20A

-20A15A15A15A20A20A10A10A15A15A10A20A10A20A10A

DESCRIPTION

FUSIBLELINK

FUSE

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM38


39

G200E01TG-GAT

Inner Panel

HTG4003-1

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM39


40

PROTECTED COMPONENTSFuel lid opener & Trunk lid switchFront lumbar support switch, IMS Control module, Driver/Passenger seat manual switchATM Key lock control module, Audio, IMS Switch, Accessory relay, Seat/Power outlet relay,Digital clock & Passenger seat belt IND.AudioTransaxle range switch, Burglar alarm relayLeft front safety window module, Left rear power window switchRight front safety window module, Right rear power window switchRight rear ICM relay boxInstrument cluster, BCM, Rear curtain module, Rain sensor, IMS Control module, Power window main switchBack warning buzzerLeft/Right outside mirror & mirror folding motor, A/C Control moduleKey solenoid, Power window main switchRear fog light relayInstrument clusterAir bag cut off switch, SRS Control module(Spare)Tilt & Telescopic module, Sport mode switchFront fog light relay, Left rear combination light, License plate light, Left headlightRight rear combination light, License plate light, Right headlight

FUSE RATING20A30A10A

15A10A30A30A30A10A15A10A20A15A10A15A10A15A10A10A

FUSET/LID

FR P/SEATAUDIO-2

AUDIO-1START

P/WDW LHP/WDW RHRR P/SEATMODULE-1PEDAL ADJMIRR HTDKEY SOLRR FOG

A/BAG INDA/BAG

SPARE-2TILT

TAIL LHTAIL RH

PROTECTED COMPONENTSFuel lid opener & Trunk lid switchFront lumbar support switch, IMS Control module, Driver/Passenger seat manual switchATM Key lock control module, Audio, IMS Switch, Accessory relay, Seat/Power outlet relay,Digital clock & Passenger seat belt IND.AudioTransaxle range switch, Burglar alarm relayLeft front safety window module, Left rear power window switchRight front safety window module, Right rear power window switchRight rear ICM relay boxInstrument cluster, BCM, Rear curtain module, Rain sensor, IMS Control module, Power window main switchBack warning buzzerLeft/Right outside mirror & mirror folding motor, A/C Control moduleKey solenoid, Power window main switchRear fog light relayInstrument clusterAir bag cut off switch, SRS Control module(Spare)Tilt & Telescopic module, Sport mode switchFront fog light relay, Left rear combination light, License plate light, Left headlight

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM40


41

PROTECTED COMPONENTSDriver seat warmer switchInstrument cluster, ESP Switch, BCM, ATM Key lock control module, YAW Rate sensor,Multi-function switchA/C Control module, Tilt & Telescopic module, Rheostat, Electric chromic mirror, Overheadconsole lamp(Spare)Cigarette lighterBCMRear curtain moduleHeadlight relay, AQS & Ambient sensor, HID relay, Headlight leveling actuatorA/C Control module, Blower relay, A/C Control module(AUTO)Data link connector, A/C Control module, Instrument cluster, Multi-function switch, Tilt &Telescopic module, BCM, Door warning switch, Room lamp, Left/Right foot lamp, Door lamp(Spare)Rear power outletWasher relay, Wiper relay(High), Wiper relayFuse(MEMORY, AUDIO-1)

FUSE RATING10A10A

10A

10A15A15A10A10A10A15A

15A15A25A30A

FUSES/HTR

MODULE-2

A/CON

DIESELC/LIGHTER

T/SIGRR CURTAIN

H/LPA/CON SWMEMORY

PICACC SOCKET

WIPERPOWER CONN

TGgene-6.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM41

Emission Control System ............................................ 7-2Catalytic Converter ...................................................... 7-3

7

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

7

TGgene-7.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM1

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

2 EMISSION CONTROLSYSTEMS

H010A01A-GAT

(If Installed)

Your Hyundai is equipped with anemission control system to meet allrequirements of the Emission prohibi-tion rules of your province.There are three emission control sys-tems which are as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control sys-tem

(2) Evaporative emission control sys-tem

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper functionof the emission control systems, it isrecommended that you have your carinspected and maintained by an au-thorized Hyundai dealer in accordancewith the maintenance schedule in thismanual.

H010B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission ControlSystem

The positive crankcase ventilation(PCV) system is employed to preventair pollution caused by blow-by gasesbeing emitted from the crankcase.This system supplies fresh filtered airto the crankcase through the air in-take hose. Inside the crankcase, thefresh air mixes with blow-by gases,which then pass through the PCVvalve into the induction system.

H010C02Y-GAT

2. Evaporative EmissionControl System

The Evaporative Emission ControlSystem is designed to prevent fuelvapors from escaping into the atmo-sphere.

Canister

While the engine is inoperative, fuelvapors generated inside the fuel tankare absorbed and stored in the canis-ter. When the engine is running, thefuel vapors absorbed in the canisterare drawn into the induction systemthrough the purge control solenoidvalve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve

The purge control solenoid valve iscontrolled by the ECM (Engine ControlModule); when the engine coolant tem-perature is low, and during idling, itcloses, so that evaporated fuel is nottaken into the surge tank. After enginewarm-up, during ordinary driving, itopens so as to introduce evaporatedfuel to the surge tank.

TGgene-7.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM2

7EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

3

!

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

H020A01A-AAT

All Hyundai vehicles are equippedwith a monolith type three-way cata-lytic converter to reduce the carbonmonoxide, hydrocarbons and nitro-gen oxides contained in the exhaustgas. Exhaust gases passing throughthe catalytic converter cause it tooperate at a very high temperature.The introduction of large amounts ofunburned gasoline into the exhaustmay cause the catalytic converter tooverheat and create a fire hazard.This risk may be reduced by observ-ing the following:

Catalytic Converter

H010D01A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission ControlSystem

The Exhaust Emission Control Sys-tem is a highly effective system whichcontrols exhaust emissions whilemaintaining good vehicle performance.

WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.o Maintain the engine in good

operating condition. Extremelyhigh catalytic converter tempera-tures can result from improperoperation of the electrical, igni-tion or multiport electronic fuelinjection.

o If your engine stalls, pings,knocks, or is hard to start, haveyour Hyundai dealer inspect andrepair the problem as soon aspossible.

o Avoid driving with a very lowfuel level. Running out of gaso-line may cause the engine tomisfire and result in damage tothe catalytic converter.

o Avoid idling the engine for peri-ods longer than 10 minutes.

o The vehicle should not bepushed or pulled to get started.This may cause the catalyticconverter to overheat and cre-ate a fire hazard.

H020A01TG

TGgene-7.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM3

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

4

o Do not touch the catalytic con-verter or any other part of theexhaust system while the cata-lytic converter is hot. Shut offthe engine, wait for at least onehour before touching the cata-lytic converter or any other partof the exhaust system.

o Remember that your Hyundaidealer is your best source ofassistance.

o Do not stop your Hyundai overany combustible material suchas grass, paper, leaves or rags.These materials might contactthe hot catalytic converter and afire might result.

TGgene-7.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM4

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................ 8-2Engine Number ............................................................ 8-2Recommended Inflation Pressures .............................. 8-2Snow Tires ................................................................... 8-3Tire Chains ................................................................... 8-4Tire Rotation ................................................................. 8-4Tire Balancing............................................................... 8-5Tire Traction ................................................................. 8-5When to Replace Tires ................................................ 8-5Spare Tire and Tools ................................................... 8-6 8

CONSUMER INFORMATION

8

TGgene-8.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM1

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION

2 TIREVEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)

I010B01A-AATI010A01A-GAT

The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the number used in registering yourcar and in all legal matters pertainingto its ownership, etc.It can be found on the identificationplate attached to the engine side ofthe firewall between the engine andpassenger compartment.

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown in the drawing.

I020A01A-AAT

TIRE INFORMATION

The tires supplied on your newHyundai are chosen to provide thebest performance for normal driving.

I030A01NF-GAT

RECOMMENDED INFLATIONPRESSURES

The tire label located on the driver'sside of the center pillar outer panelgives the tire pressures recommendedfor your car.

I010A01TG HTG6003

I030A01TG

ENGINE NUMBER

TGgene-8.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM2

8CONSUMER INFORMATION

3

CAUTION:Always observe the following:o Check pressures when the tires

are cold. That is, after the carhas been parked for at least threehours and hasn't been drivenmore than 1.6 km or one milesince starting up.

o Check the pressure of your sparetire each time you check thepressure of other tires.

These pressures were chosen to pro-vide the most satisfactory combina-tion of ride comfort, tire wear andstability under normal conditions.Tire pressures should be checked atleast monthly. Proper tire inflationpressures should be maintained forthese reasons:

o Lower-than-recommended tirepressures cause uneven tread wearand poor handling.

o Higher-than-recommended tirepressures increase the chance ofdamage from impacts and causeuneven tread wear.

!I040A02S-GAT

SNOW TIRES

If you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size andhave the same load capacity as theoriginal tires. Snow tires should beinstalled on all four wheels; other-wise, poor handling may result.Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4psi) more air pressure than the pres-sure recommended for the standardtires on the tire label on the driver'sside of the center pillar outer panel, orup to the maximum pressure shownon the tire sidewall, whichever is less.Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75mph) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.

I030A02TG

TGgene-8.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM3


4

!

I060A01Y-GAT

TIRE ROTATION

Tires should be rotated every 10,000km (6,000 miles). If you notice thattires are wearing unevenly betweenrotations, have the car checked by aHyundai dealer so the cause may becorrected.After rotating, adjust the tire pres-sures and be sure to check wheel nuttightness.

I050A01TG-GAT

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains should be installed on thefront wheels. Be sure that the chainsare the proper size and that they areinstalled in accordance with themanufacturer's instructions.To minimize tire and chain wear, donot continue to use tire chains whenthey are no longer needed.

WARNING:o When driving on roads covered

with snow or ice, drive at lessthan 30 km/h (20 mph).

o Use the SAE "S" class or wirechains.

o Don't use a tire chains to thevehicle which aluminium wheelsare installed to keep the wheels.If it is on unavoidable circum-stances, use a wire chains.

o Use wire chains less than 15mmto prevent damage to the chain'sconnection.

o If you have noise caused bychains contacting the body, re-tighten the chain to avoid contactwith the vehicle body.

o To prevent body damage, re-tighten the chains after driving0.5 ~ 1 km.

I060A01HP

TGgene-8.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM4

8CONSUMER INFORMATION

5

! WARNING:Do not mix bias-ply and radial-plytires under any circumstances. Thismay cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics that may causedeath, serious injury, or propertydamage.

I070A01A-AAT

TIRE BALANCING

A tire that is out of balance may affecthandling and tire wear. The tires onyour Hyundai were balanced beforethe car was delivered but may needbalancing again during the years youown the car.Whenever a tire is dismounted forrepair, it should be rebalanced beforebeing reinstalled on the car.

I080A01A-AAT

TIRE TRACTION

Tire traction can be reduced if youdrive on worn tires, tires that areimproperly inflated or on slippery roadsurfaces. Tires should be replacedwhen tread wear indicators appear.To reduce the possibility of losingcontrol, slow down whenever there israin, snow or ice on the road.

I090A01Y-GAT

WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES

The original tires on your car havetread wear indicators. The tread wearindicators appear when the treaddepth is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.). The tireshould be replaced when these ap-pear as a solid bar across two ormore grooves of the tread. Alwaysreplace your tires with those of therecommended size. If you changewheels, the new wheel's rim widthand offset must meet Hyundai speci-fications.

HTG5016

Tread wearindicator

1.6 mm (0.06 in.)

TGgene-8.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM5


6

!

SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS

I100A01NF-GAT

Your Hyundai is delivered with thefollowing:

Spare tire and wheelWrench bar (1), Jack (2),Wheel nut wrench (3),Spanner (4),Tool Receptacle (5),Screwdriver (6)

WARNING:o Driving on worn-out tires is dan-

gerous! Worn-out tires cancause loss of braking effective-ness, steering control and trac-tion. When replacing tires, nevermix radial and bias-ply tires onthe same car. If you replace ra-dial tires with bias-ply tires, theymust be installed in sets of four.

o Using tires and wheels of otherthan the recommended sizesmay cause unusual handlingcharacteristics that may causedeath, serious injury, or prop-erty damage.

I100A01TG

TGgene-8.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM6

9

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

MEASUREMENT ......................................................... 9-2ENGINE ....................................................................... 9-3LUBRICATION CHART ............................................... 9-4

9

TGgene-9.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM1

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

Standard

Option

Spare

225/60 R16

235/55 R17

Full Size

3.3L

130A (13.5V)

J010A01TG-GAT

MEASUREMENT

4895 (192.7)

1865 (73.4)

1490 (58.6)

2780 (109.4)

1580 (62.2)

1565 (61.6)

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Wheel base

Wheel tread Front

Rear

Type

Wheel free play

Rack stroke

Oil pump type

Rack and pinion

0 ~ 30 mm (0 ~ 1.18 in.)

146 mm (5.74 in.)

Vane type

J060A01TG-GAT

FUEL SYSTEM

J020A01TG-GAT

POWER STEERING

J030A01TG-GAT

TIRE

Item

Battery

Alternator

J040A01TG-GAT

ELECTRICAL

mm (in.)

Fuel tank capacity 75 liter

CMF 68AH

J050A01TG-GAT

BRAKE

Dual hydraulic with brake booster

Ventilated disc

Solid disc

Cable operated on rear wheel

Type

Front brake type

Rear brake type

Parking brake

TGgene-9.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM2

9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

3

3.3L

6-Cyl., V-type DOHC

92.0 x 83.8

3,342

1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6

0.17 ~ 0.23 mm

0.27 ~ 0.33 mm

IFR5G-11*

BKR5ES

1.0 - 1.1 mm

0.7 ~ 0.8 mm

720 ± 100

BTDC 10° ± 5°

ENGINE

J070A01TG -GAT

ITEMS

Engine Type

Bore x Stroke (mm)

Displacement (cc)

Firing order

Valve clearance (Warm engine) Intake

Exhaust

Spark plug Unleaded

Leaded

Spark plug gap Unleaded

Leaded

Idle speed (RPM)

Ignition timing (Base)

* : Iridium coated.

TGgene-9.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM3

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4

Oil & Grease Standard

API SJ, SL or ABOVE, SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 (ALL TEMP. RANGE)

ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE SAE 10W-30 (ABOVE -18°C)

SAE 15W-40 (ABOVE -13°C)

SAE 20W-50 (ABOVE -7°C)

Normal driving condition

Severe driving condition

HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III,

SK ATF SP III or other brands approved by Hyundai Motor Co.,

Ethylene glycol, base for aluminum

PSF-3 TYPE FLUID

DOT 3 or DOT 4 Equivalent

LUBRICATION CHART

J080A01TG-GAT

Quantity (liter)

Drain and refill ;

With oil filter : 5.6

Without oil filter : 5.2

MAX. 1L /1500 Km

MAX. 1L /1000 Km

10.9

8.6

0.9

As required

Item

Engine Oil

Engine oil consumption

Transaxle

Coolant

Power steering

Brake fluid

Automatic

TGgene-9.P65 6/9/2005, 6:02 PM4

2006 azera manual

Documents